summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt')
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt9501
1 files changed, 5868 insertions, 3633 deletions
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
index d6bc68bdb6..1fd8656a7e 100644
--- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
24 Splitting the input
25 Front/back matter
26 Letters
-27 Terminal input/output
-28 Command line
+27 Input/output
+28 Command line interface
Appendix A Document templates
Index
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
2.3 TeX engines
2.4 LaTeX command syntax
2.5 Environment
- 2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+ 2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
3 Document classes
3.1 Document class options
3.2 Additional packages
@@ -45,16 +45,29 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
3.3.1 Class and package structure
3.3.2 Class and package commands
4 Fonts
- 4.1 Font styles
- 4.2 Font sizes
- 4.3 Low-level font commands
+ 4.1 'fontenc' package
+ 4.1.1 '\DeclareFontEncoding'
+ 4.1.2 '\DeclareTextAccent'
+ 4.1.3 '\DeclareTextAccentDefault'
+ 4.1.4 '\DeclareTextCommand' & '\ProvideTextCommand'
+ 4.1.5 '\DeclareTextCommandDefault' & '\ProvideTextCommandDefault '
+ 4.1.6 '\DeclareTextComposite'
+ 4.1.7 '\DeclareTextCompositeCommand'
+ 4.1.8 '\DeclareTextSymbol'
+ 4.1.9 '\DeclareTextSymbolDefault'
+ 4.1.10 '\LastDeclaredEncoding'
+ 4.1.11 '\UseTextSymbol' & '\UseTextAccent'
+ 4.2 Font styles
+ 4.3 Font sizes
+ 4.4 Low-level font commands
5 Layout
5.1 '\onecolumn'
5.2 '\twocolumn'
5.3 '\flushbottom'
5.4 '\raggedbottom'
5.5 Page layout parameters
- 5.6 Floats
+ 5.6 '\baselineskip' & '\baselinestretch'
+ 5.7 Floats
6 Sectioning
6.1 '\part'
6.2 '\chapter'
@@ -63,11 +76,12 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
6.5 '\subsubsection', '\paragraph', '\subparagraph'
6.6 '\appendix'
6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
- 6.8 '\@startsection'
+ 6.8 '\@startsection', typesetting sectional unit headings
7 Cross references
7.1 '\label'
7.2 '\pageref'
7.3 '\ref'
+ 7.4 'xr' package
8 Environments
8.1 'abstract'
8.2 'array'
@@ -82,7 +96,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
8.8 'eqnarray'
8.9 'equation'
8.10 'figure'
- 8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
+ 8.11 'filecontents'
8.12 'flushleft'
8.12.1 '\raggedright'
8.13 'flushright'
@@ -164,6 +178,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
12.10 '\newfont'
12.11 '\protect'
12.12 '\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend'
+ 12.13 xspace package
13 Counters
13.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
13.2 '\usecounter'
@@ -180,6 +195,8 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
14.4 '\settodepth'
14.5 '\settoheight'
14.6 '\settowidth'
+ 14.7 '\stretch'
+ 14.8 Expressions
15 Making paragraphs
15.1 '\par'
15.2 '\indent' & '\noindent'
@@ -188,23 +205,28 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
16 Math formulas
16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
16.2 Math symbols
- 16.2.1 Blackboard bold
- 16.2.2 Calligraphic
- 16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
- 16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+ 16.2.1 Arrows
+ 16.2.2 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+ 16.2.3 Blackboard bold
+ 16.2.4 Calligraphic
+ 16.2.5 Delimiters
+ 16.2.5.1 '\left' & '\right'
+ 16.2.5.2 '\bigl', '\bigr', etc.
+ 16.2.6 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+ 16.2.7 Greek letters
16.3 Math functions
16.4 Math accents
16.5 Over- and Underlining
16.6 Spacing in math mode
16.6.1 '\smash'
16.6.2 '\phantom' & '\vphantom' & '\hphantom'
+ 16.6.3 '\mathstrut'
16.7 Math miscellany
16.7.1 Colon character ':' & '\colon'
16.7.2 '\*'
16.7.3 '\frac'
- 16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
- 16.7.5 '\sqrt'
- 16.7.6 '\stackrel'
+ 16.7.4 '\sqrt'
+ 16.7.5 '\stackrel'
17 Modes
17.1 '\ensuremath'
18 Page styles
@@ -265,18 +287,23 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
23.3 Symbols by font position
23.4 Text symbols
23.5 Accents
+ 23.5.1 '\accent'
23.6 Additional Latin letters
- 23.7 '\rule'
- 23.8 '\today'
+ 23.7 'inputenc' package
+ 23.8 '\rule'
+ 23.9 '\today'
24 Splitting the input
24.1 '\endinput'
24.2 '\include' & '\includeonly'
24.3 '\input'
25 Front/back matter
25.1 Table of contents etc.
- 25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
- 25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
- 25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+ 25.1.1 '\@dottedtocline'
+ 25.1.2 '\addcontentsline'
+ 25.1.3 '\addtocontents'
+ 25.1.4 '\contentsline'
+ 25.1.5 '\nofiles'
+ 25.1.6 '\numberline'
25.2 Indexes
25.2.1 '\index'
25.2.2 'makeindex'
@@ -296,25 +323,32 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
26.9 '\ps'
26.10 '\signature'
26.11 '\telephone'
-27 Terminal input/output
- 27.1 '\typein'
- 27.2 '\typeout'
-28 Command line
+27 Input/output
+ 27.1 '\openin' & '\openout'
+ 27.2 '\read'
+ 27.3 '\typein'
+ 27.4 '\typeout'
+ 27.5 '\write'
+ 27.5.1 '\write' and security
+ 27.5.2 '\message'
+ 27.5.3 '\wlog'
+ 27.5.4 '\write18'
+28 Command line interface
28.1 Command line options
28.2 Command line input
- 28.3 Recovering from errors
+ 28.3 Jobname
+ 28.4 Recovering from errors
Appendix A Document templates
A.1 'beamer' template
A.2 'article' template
A.3 'book' template
A.4 Larger 'book' template
- A.5 'tugboat' template
Index
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of October
-2018) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of July 2021)
+for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
1 About this document
*********************
@@ -323,48 +357,38 @@ This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
program (*note Overview::).
- This document's home page is
-<https://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman>. There you can get
-the sources, subscribe to the mailing list or read its archives, see
-other infrastructure, and get the current output in various formats. In
-particular, the output comes in two web formats. Probably the most
-convenient one, shown at <http://latexref.xyz/>, has pages for each
-topic and so is good for a quick lookup; see also the note there about
-easy-to-remember links. The other, shown at
-<http://svn.gnu.org.ua/viewvc/latexrefman/trunk/latex2e.html?view=co>,
-has all the information on single page.
+ This document's home page is <https://latexref.xyz>; it has separate
+web pages for each topic. Alternatively.
+<https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html> has the entire document on a
+single page. For other output formats, the sources, and plenty more
+information, see <https://latexref.xyz/dev/>.
In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
ago.
- LaTeX is currently maintained by a group of volunteers
-(<http://latex-project.org>). The official documentation written by the
-LaTeX project is available from their web site. This document is
-completely unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX
-maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else about this
-document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
+ LaTeX is maintained by a group of volunteers
+(<https://latex-project.org>). The official documentation written by
+the LaTeX project is available from their web site. The present
+document is completely unofficial and has not been written or reviewed
+by the LaTeX maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else
+about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
<latexrefman@tug.org>.
- This document is a reference. There is a vast array of other sources
-of information about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a few
-introductions.
+ This document is a reference, not a tutorial. There is a vast array
+of other information available about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a
+few introductions.
-<http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
+<https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr>
Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
-<http://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
+<https://ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc>
Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
-<http://ctan.org/pkg/usrguide>
- The guide for document authors that is maintained as part of LaTeX.
- Many other guides by many other people are also available,
- independent of LaTeX itself; one such is the next item:
+<https://ctan.org/pkg/lshort>
+ A longer introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
-<http://ctan.org/pkg/lshort>
- A short introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
-
-<http://tug.org/begin.html>
+<https://tug.org/begin.html>
Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
references.
@@ -372,20 +396,24 @@ introductions.
*******************
LaTeX is a system for typesetting documents. It was originally created
-by Leslie Lamport and is now maintained by a group of volunteers
-(<http://latex-project.org>). It is widely used, particularly for
-complex and technical documents, such as those involving mathematics.
-
- A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text along with
-interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
-should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
-that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the
-technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine).
-The user produces the output document by giving that input file to the
-TeX engine.
+by Leslie Lamport in 1984, but has been maintained by a group of
+volunteers for many years now (<https://latex-project.org>). It is
+widely used, particularly but not exclusively for mathematical and
+technical documents.
+
+ A LaTeX user writes an input file containing text to be typeset along
+with interspersed commands. The default encoding for the text is UTF-8
+(as of 2018). The commands specify, for example, how the text should be
+formatted.
+
+ LaTeX is implemented as a set of related so-called "macros" which use
+Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program or one of its derivatives,
+collectively known as "engines". Thus, the user produces output,
+typically PDF, by giving the input file to a TeX engine. (The following
+sections describe all this in more detail.)
The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
-the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
+the input document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
available to a LaTeX user.
The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX". It is pronounced LAH-teck
@@ -439,7 +467,7 @@ main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.
'.pdf' file with 'dvipdfmx'. The contents of the file can be
dumped in human-readable form with 'dvitype'. A vast array of
other DVI utility programs are available
- (<http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).
+ (<https://mirror.ctan.org/dviware>).
'.pdf'
If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'pdflatex', among other
@@ -447,7 +475,7 @@ main output file's name ends in either '.dvi' or '.pdf'.
Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained
file, with all fonts and images included.
- LaTeX also produces at least two additional files.
+ LaTeX always produces at least two additional files.
'.log'
This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of
@@ -474,20 +502,24 @@ particular class may create others; the list is open-ended.
2.3 TeX engines
===============
-LaTeX is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a TeX
-implementation (*note Overview::). This section gives a terse overview
-of the main programs (see also *note Command line::).
+LaTeX is a large set of commands that is executed by a TeX program
+(*note Overview::). Such a set of commands is called a "format", and is
+embodied in a binary '.fmt' file, which can be read much more quickly
+than the corresponding TeX source.
+
+ This section gives a terse overview of the TeX programs that are
+commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
'latex'
'pdflatex'
- In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
+ In TeX Live (<https://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
- engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
+ engine is run (<https://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
output is a '.pdf' file.
pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original
- program (<http://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
+ program (<https://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
@@ -498,16 +530,16 @@ of the main programs (see also *note Command line::).
'lualatex'
If LaTeX is invoked via the system command 'lualatex', the LuaTeX
- engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>). This program allows
+ engine is run (<https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>). This program allows
code written in the scripting language Lua (<http://luatex.org>) to
interact with TeX's typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and
produces a '.pdf' file by default. There is also 'dvilualatex' to
- produce a '.dvi' file, but this is rarely used.
+ produce a '.dvi' file.
'xelatex'
If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
- engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
+ engine is run (<https://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
@@ -518,9 +550,40 @@ of the main programs (see also *note Command line::).
process is automatic. The '.xdv' file is only useful for
debugging.
- Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional
-support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
-<http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex>, <http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>).
+'platex'
+'uplatex'
+ These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese
+ and other languages; the 'u' variant supports Unicode. See
+ <https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex> and <https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>.
+
+ As of 2019, there is a companion '-dev' command and format for all of
+the above:
+
+'dvilualatex-dev'
+'latex-dev'
+'lualatex-dev'
+'pdflatex-dev'
+'platex-dev'
+'uplatex-dev'
+'xelatex-dev'
+ These are candidates for an upcoming LaTeX release. The main
+ purpose is to find and address compatibility problems before an
+ official release.
+
+ These '-dev' formats make it easy for anyone to help test documents
+ and code: you can run, say, 'pdflatex-dev' instead of 'pdflatex',
+ without changing anything else in your environment. Indeed, it is
+ easiest and most helpful to always run the '-dev' versions instead
+ of bothering to switch back and forth. During quiet times after a
+ release, the commands will be equivalent.
+
+ These are not daily snapshots or untested development code. They
+ undergo the same extensive regression testing by the LaTeX team
+ before being released.
+
+ For more information, see "The LaTeX release workflow and the LaTeX
+ 'dev' formats" by Frank Mittelbach, 'TUGboat' 40:2,
+ <https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf>.
2.4 LaTeX command syntax
========================
@@ -530,9 +593,9 @@ character, '\'. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
letters or (b) a single non-letter.
LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
-from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most commands
-are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same
-case as they are defined.
+from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most command
+names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the
+same case as they are defined.
A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
@@ -547,12 +610,6 @@ bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
- Some of LaTeX's commands are a "declaration". Such a command changes
-the value the meaning of some other command or parameter. For instance,
-the '\mainmatter' declaration changes the typesetting of page numbers
-from roman numerals to arabic (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter &
-\backmatter::).
-
LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
@@ -560,30 +617,36 @@ The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+ As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the 'expl3' and 'xparse'
+packages are part of the LaTeX2e format. They provide a completely
+different underlying programming language syntax. We won't try to cover
+them in this document; see the related package documentation and other
+LaTeX manuals.
+
2.5 Environment
===============
Synopsis:
- \begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
...
- \end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT-NAME}
- An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
-behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
-'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
+ An "environment" is an area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is
+a distinct behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines
+between '\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
\begin{verse}
There once was a man from Nantucket \\
...
\end{verse}
- *Note Environments:: for a list of environments. Particularly
+ *Note Environments::, for a list of environments. Particularly
notable is that every LaTeX document must have a 'document' environment,
a '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' pair.
- The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
-end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
+ The ENVIRONMENT-NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT-NAME ends in a
star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
@@ -595,7 +658,7 @@ required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
... rows of table ...
\end{tabular}
-2.6 CTAN: the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
===============================================
The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
@@ -609,17 +672,19 @@ person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
specifications.
- In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features
-such as search by name or by functionality.
+ In addition to the massive holdings, the 'ctan.org' web site offers
+features such as search by name or by functionality.
+
+ CTAN is not a single host, but instead is a set of hosts, one of
+which is the so-called "master". The master host actively manages the
+material, for instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.
+For many years, it has been hosted by the German TeX group, DANTE e.V.
- CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the
-sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for
-instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is hosted
-by the German TeX group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the world help out
-by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their collections with the
-core site and then in turn making their copies publicly available. This
-gives users close to their location better access and relieves the load
-on the core site. The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
+ Other sites around the world help out by mirroring, that is,
+automatically syncing their collections with the master site and then in
+turn making their copies publicly available. This gives users close to
+their location better access and relieves the load on the master site.
+The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
3 Document classes
******************
@@ -649,9 +714,10 @@ document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
'slides'
- For slide presentations--rarely used today. In its place the
- 'beamer' package is perhaps the most prevalent (*note beamer
- template::).
+ For slide presentations--rarely used nowadays. The 'beamer'
+ package is perhaps the most prevalent
+ (<https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer>). *Note beamer template::, for a
+ small template for a beamer document.
Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section.
@@ -836,7 +902,7 @@ class to provide the basis for this class's code.
For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
Class Guide, at
-<http://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
+<https://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
<https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.
@@ -912,11 +978,11 @@ These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
this will produce a warning like 'Unused global option(s):
- [badoption].' Change this behaviour with the starred version
+ [badoption].' Change this behavior with the starred version
'\DeclareOption*{CODE}'. For example, many classes extend an
- existing class, using a declaration such as '\LoadClass{article}',
- and for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such
- as this.
+ existing class, using a command such as '\LoadClass{article}', and
+ for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such as
+ this.
\DeclareOption*{%
\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
@@ -963,8 +1029,8 @@ These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
exists, in that case you need to use either '\renew...' or
'\provide...' or you get an error.
-'\IfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
-'\InputIfFileExists{FILE NAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+'\IfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
+'\InputIfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}'
Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file 'FILE NAME' or FALSE CODE
otherwise. In the first case it executing TRUE CODE and then
inputs the file. Thus the command
@@ -1150,11 +1216,11 @@ These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only
rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
-'\ProvidesFile{FILE NAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
+'\ProvidesFile{FILENAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]'
Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in
that file and you get in the log a string like 'File: test.config
- 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILE NAME equal to
+ 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls' for FILENAME equal to
'test.config' and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to '2017/10/12
config file for test.cls'.
@@ -1188,31 +1254,464 @@ These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
4 Fonts
*******
-Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a
-style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
+LaTeX comes with powerful font capacities. For one thing, its New Font
+Selection Scheme allows you to work easily with the font families in
+your document (for instance, see *note Font styles::). And, LaTeX
+documents can use most fonts that are available today, including
+versions of Times Roman, Helvetica, Courier, etc. (Note, though, that
+many fonts do not have support for mathematics.)
+
+ The first typeface in the TeX world was the Computer Modern family,
+developed by Donald Knuth. It is the default for LaTeX documents and is
+still the most widely used. But changing to another font often only
+involves a few commands. For instance, putting the following in your
+preamble gives you a Palatino-like font, which is handsome and more
+readable online than many other fonts, while still allowing you to
+typeset mathematics. (This example is from Michael Sharpe,
+<https://math.ucsd.edu/~msharpe/RcntFnts.pdf>.)
+
+ \usepackage[osf]{newpxtext} % osf for text, not math
+ \usepackage{cabin} % sans serif
+ \usepackage[varqu,varl]{inconsolata} % sans serif typewriter
+ \usepackage[bigdelims,vvarbb]{newpxmath} % bb from STIX
+ \usepackage[cal=boondoxo]{mathalfa} % mathcal
+
+In addition, the 'xelatex' or 'lualatex' engines allow you to use any
+fonts on your system that are in OpenType or TrueType format (*note TeX
+engines::).
+
+ The LaTeX Font Catalogue (<https://tug.org/FontCatalogue>) shows font
+sample graphics and copy-and-pasteable source to use many fonts,
+including many with support for mathematics. It aims to cover all Latin
+alphabet free fonts available for easy use with LaTeX.
+
+ More information is also available from the TeX Users Group, at
+<https://www.tug.org/fonts/>.
+
+4.1 'fontenc' package
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage[FONT_ENCODING]{fontenc}
+
+ or
+
+ \usepackage[FONT_ENCODING1, FONT_ENCODING2, ...]{fontenc}
+
+ Specify the font encodings. A font encoding is a mapping of the
+character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output.
+
+ This package only applies if you use the 'pdflatex' engine (*note TeX
+engines::). If you use the 'xelatex' or 'lualatex' engine then instead
+use the 'fontspec' package.
+
+ TeX's original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
+set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use
+'\accent' (*note \accent::) but this disables hyphenation. TeX users
+have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of
+characters provided by modern fonts. If you are using 'pdflatex' then
+this in the preamble
+
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+gives you support for the most widespread European languages, including
+French, German, Italian, Polish, and others. In particular, if you have
+words with accented letters then LaTeX will hyphenate them and your
+output can be copied and pasted. (The optional second line allows you
+to directly enter accented characters into your source file.)
+
+ If you are using an encoding such as 'T1' and the characters appear
+blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped,
+sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a
+package such as 'lmodern' or 'cm-super' to get a font that extends
+LaTeX's default using vector fonts.
+
+ For each FONT_ENCODING given as an option but not already declared,
+this package loads the encoding definition files, named
+'FONT_ENCODINGenc.def'. It also sets '\encodingdefault' to be the last
+encoding in the option list.
+
+ These are the common values for FONT_ENCODING.
+
+'OT1'
+ The original encoding for TeX. Limited to mostly English
+ characters.
+
+'OMS, OML'
+ Math symbols and math letters encoding.
+
+'T1'
+ TeX text extended. Sometimes called the Cork encoding for the
+ Users Group meeting where it was developed. Gives access to most
+ European accented characters. The most common option for this
+ package.
+
+'TS1'
+ Text Companion encoding.
+
+LaTeX's default is to load 'OML', 'T1', 'OT1', and then 'OMS', and set
+the default to 'OT1'.
+
+ Even if you do not use accented letters, you may need to specify a
+font encoding if your font requires it.
+
+ If you use 'T1' encoded fonts other than the default Computer Modern
+family then you may need to load the package that selects your fonts
+before loading 'fontenc', to prevent the system from loading any
+'T1' encoded fonts from the default.
+
+ The LaTeX team reserve encoding names starting with: 'T' for the
+standard text encodings with 256 characters, 'TS' for symbols that
+extend the corresponding T encodings, 'X' for test encodings, 'M' for
+standard math encodings with 256 characters, 'A' for special
+applications, 'OT' for standard text encodings with 128 characters, and
+'OM' for standard math encodings with 128 characters ('O' stands for
+'obsolete').
+
+ This package provides a number of commands, detailed below. Many of
+them are encoding-specific, so if you have defined a command that works
+for one encoding but the current encoding is different then the command
+is not in effect.
+
+4.1.1 '\DeclareFontEncoding'
+----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareFontEncoding{ENCODING}{TEXT-SETTINGS}{MATH-SETTINGS}
+
+ Declare the font encoding ENCODING. It also saves the value of
+ENCODING in '\LastDeclaredEncoding' (*note \LastDeclaredEncoding::).
+
+ The file 't1enc.def' contains this line (followed by many others).
+
+ \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
+
+ The TEXT-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX will run every time it
+switches from one encoding to another with the '\selectfont' or
+'\fontencoding' command. The MATH-SETTINGS are the commands that LaTeX
+will use whenever the font is accessed as a math alphabet.
+
+ LaTeX ignores any space characters inside TEXT-SETTINGS and
+MATH-SETTINGS, to prevent unintended spaces in the output.
+
+ If you invent an encoding you should pick a two or three letter name
+starting with 'L' for 'local', or 'E' for 'experimental'.
+
+ Note that output encoding files may be read several times by LaTeX so
+using, e.g., '\newcommand' may cause an error. In addition, such files
+should contain '\ProvidesFile' line (*note Class and package
+commands::).
+
+ Note also that you should use the '\...Default' commands only in a
+package, not in the encoding definition files, since those files should
+only contain declarations specific to that encoding.
+
+4.1.2 '\DeclareTextAccent'
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextAccent{CMD}{ENCODING}{SLOT}
+
+ Define an accent, to be put on top of other glyphs, in the encoding
+ENCODING at the location SLOT.
+
+ This line from 't1enc.def' declares that to make a circumflex accent
+as in '\^A', the system will put the accent in slot 2 over the 'A'
+character, which is represented in ASCII as 65. (This holds unless
+there is a relevant 'DeclareTextComposite' or
+'\DeclareTextCompositeCommand' declaration; *note
+\DeclareTextComposite::.)
+
+ \DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}
+
+ If CMD has already been defined then '\DeclareTextAccent' does not
+give an error but it does log the redefinition in the transcript file.
+
+4.1.3 '\DeclareTextAccentDefault'
+---------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextAccentDefault{CMD}{ENCODING}
+
+ If there is an encoding-specific accent command CMD but there is no
+associated '\DeclareTextAccent' for that encoding then this command will
+pick up the slack, by saying to use it as described for ENCODING.
+
+ For example, to make the encoding 'OT1' be the default encoding for
+the accent '\"', declare this.
+
+ \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1}
+
+If you issue a '\"' when the current encoding does not have a definition
+for that accent then LaTeX will use the definition from 'OT1'
+
+ That is, this command is equivalent to this call (*note
+\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent::).
+
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault[1]{CMD}
+ {\UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{CMD}{#1}}
+
+ Note that '\DeclareTextAccentDefault' works for any one-argument
+'fontenc' command, not just the accent command.
+
+4.1.4 '\DeclareTextCommand' & '\ProvideTextCommand'
+---------------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \DeclareTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}{DEFN}
+ \DeclareTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \DeclareTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ or one of:
+
+ \ProvideTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}{DEFN}
+ \ProvideTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \ProvideTextCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ Define the command CMD, which will be specific to one encoding. The
+command name CMD must begin with a backslash, \. These commands can
+only appear in the preamble. Redefining 'cmd' does not cause an error.
+The defined command will be robust even if the code in DEFN is fragile
+(*note \protect::).
+
+ For example, the file 't1enc.def' contains this line.
+
+ \DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{T1}{\%\char 24 }
+
+ With that, you can express parts per thousand.
+
+ \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % in preamble
+ ...
+ Legal limit is \( 0.8 \)\textperthousand.
+
+If you change the font encoding to 'OT1' then you get an error like
+'LaTeX Error: Command \textperthousand unavailable in encoding OT1'.
+
+ The '\ProvideTextCommand' variant does the same, except that it does
+nothing if CMD is already defined. The '\DeclareTextSymbol' command is
+faster than this one for simple slot-to-glyph association (*note
+\DeclareTextSymbol::)
+
+ The optional NARGS and OPTARGSDEFAULT arguments play the same role
+here as in '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
+Briefly, NARGS is an integer from 0 to 9 specifying the number of
+arguments that the defined command 'cmd' takes. This number includes
+any optional argument. Omitting this argument is the same as specifying
+0, meaning that CMD will have no arguments. And, if OPTARGSDEFAULT is
+present then the first argument of '\CMD' is optional, with default
+value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If OPTARGSDEFAULT
+is not present then '\CMD' does not take an optional argument.
+
+4.1.5 '\DeclareTextCommandDefault' & '\ProvideTextCommandDefault '
+------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{CMD}{DEFN}
+
+ or:
+
+ \ProvideTextCommandDefault{CMD}{DEFN}
+
+ Give a default definition for CMD, for when that command is not
+defined in the encoding currently in force. This default should only
+use encodings known to be available.
+
+ This makes '\copyright' available.
+
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}}
+
+ It uses only an encoding (OMS) that is always available.
+
+ The '\DeclareTextCommandDefault' should not occur in the encoding
+definition files since those files should declare only commands for use
+when you select that encoding. It should instead be in a package.
-4.1 Font styles
+ As with the related non-default commands, the
+'\ProvideTextCommandDefault' has exactly the same behavior as
+'\DeclareTextCommandDefault' except that it does nothing if CMD is
+already defined (*note \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand::).
+So, packages can use it to provide fallbacks that other packages can
+improve upon.
+
+4.1.6 '\DeclareTextComposite'
+-----------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextComposite{CMD}{ENCODING}{SIMPLE_OBJECT}{SLOT}
+
+ Access an accented glyph directly, that is, without having to put an
+accent over a separate character.
+
+ This line from 't1enc.def' means that '\^o' will cause LaTeX to
+typeset lowercase 'o' by taking the character directly from location 224
+in the font.
+
+ \DeclareTextComposite{\^}{T1}{o}{244}
+
+ *Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. The
+SIMPLE_OBJECT should be a single character or a single command. The
+SLOT argument is usually a positive integer represented in decimal
+(although octal or hexadecimal are possible). Normally CMD has already
+been declared for this encoding, either with '\DeclareTextAccent' or
+with a one-argument '\DeclareTextCommand'. In 't1enc.def', the above
+line follows the '\DeclareTextAccent{\^}{T1}{2}' command.
+
+4.1.7 '\DeclareTextCompositeCommand'
+------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{CMD}{ENCODING}{ARG}{CODE}
+
+ A more general version of '\DeclareTextComposite' that runs arbitrary
+code with CMD.
+
+ This allows accents on 'i' to act like accents on dotless i, '\i'.
+
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i}
+
+ *Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. Normally
+CMD will have already been declared with '\DeclareTextAccent' or as a
+one argument '\DeclareTextCommand'.
+
+4.1.8 '\DeclareTextSymbol'
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextSymbol{CMD}{ENCODING}{SLOT}
+
+ Define a symbol in the encoding ENCODING at the location SLOT.
+Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not mathematics.
+
+ For example, this line from 't1enc.def' declares the number of the
+glyph to use for «, the left guillemet.
+
+ \DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{T1}{19}
+
+The command '\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char 19}' has the
+same effect but is slower (*note \DeclareTextCommand &
+\ProvideTextCommand::).
+
+ *Note fontenc package::, for a list of common encodings. The SLOT
+can be specified in decimal, or octal (as in ''023'), or hexadecimal (as
+in '"13'), although decimal has the advantage that single quote or
+double quote could be redefined by another package.
+
+ If CMD has already been defined then '\DeclareTextSymbol' does not
+give an error but it does log the redefinition in the transcript file.
+
+4.1.9 '\DeclareTextSymbolDefault'
+---------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{CMD}{ENCODING}
+
+ If there is an encoding-specific symbol command CMD but there is no
+associated '\DeclareTextSymbol' for that encoding, then this command
+will pick up the slack, by saying to get the symbol as described for
+ENCODING.
+
+ For example, to declare that if the current encoding has no meaning
+for '\textdollar' then use the one from 'OT1', declare this.
+
+ \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textdollar}{OT1}
+
+ That is, this command is equivalent to this call (*note
+\UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent::).
+
+ \DeclareTextCommandDefault{CMD}
+ {\UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{CMD}}
+
+ Note that '\DeclareTextSymbolDefault' can be used to define a default
+for any zero-argument 'fontenc' command.
+
+4.1.10 '\LastDeclaredEncoding'
+------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \LastDeclaredEncoding
+
+ Get the name of the most recently declared encoding. The
+'\DeclareFontEncoding' command stores the name so that it can be
+retrieved with this command (*note \DeclareFontEncoding::).
+
+ This relies on '\LastDeclaredEncoding' rather than give the name of
+the encoding explicitly.
+
+ \DeclareFontEncoding{JH1}{}{}
+ \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0}
+
+4.1.11 '\UseTextSymbol' & '\UseTextAccent'
+------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \UseTextSymbol{ENCODING}{CMD}
+
+ or:
+
+ \UseTextAccent{ENCODING}{CMD}{TEXT}
+
+ Use a symbol or accent not from the current encoding.
+
+ In general, to use a 'fontenc' command in an encoding where it is not
+defined, and if the command has no arguments, then you can use it like
+this:
+
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ss}
+
+which is equivalent to this (note the outer braces form a group, so
+LaTeX reverts back to the prior encoding after the '\ss'):
+
+ {\fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\ss}
+
+ Similarly, to use a 'fontenc' command in an encoding where it is not
+defined, and if the command has one argument, you can use it like this:
+
+ \UseTextAccent{OT1}{\'}{a}
+
+which is equivalent to this (again note the outer braces forming a
+group):
+
+ {fontencoding{OT1}\selectfont\'{\fontencoding{ENC_IN_USE}\selectfont a}}
+
+Here, ENC_IN_USE is the encoding in force before this sequence of
+commands, so that 'a' is typeset using the current encoding and only the
+accent is taken from 'OT1'.
+
+4.2 Font styles
===============
The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
- In the table below the listed commands, the '\text...' commands, is
-used with an argument, as in '\textit{TEXT}'. This is the preferred
-form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the corresponding
-declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form takes no
+ In the table below the listed commands, the '\text...' commands, are
+used with an argument as in '\textit{TEXT}'. This is the preferred
+form. But shown after it in parenthesis is the corresponding
+"declaration form", which is often useful. This form takes no
arguments, as in '{\itshape TEXT}'. The scope of the declaration form
lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
In addition, each has an environment form such as
-'\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}'.
+'\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}', which we'll describe further at the
+end of the section.
- These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
-are cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying
-either of '\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily'.
+ These commands, in any of the three forms, are cumulative; for
+instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of
+'\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily'.
One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert
italic corrections if needed (*note \/::). Specifically, they insert
the italic correction unless the following character is in the list
-'\nocorrlist', which by default consists of a period and a comma. To
+'\nocorrlist', which by default consists of period and comma. To
suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use '\nocorr' at
the start or end of the command argument, such as '\textit{\nocorr
text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
@@ -1259,8 +1758,8 @@ as declarations: '{\CMD...}' instead of '\CMD{...}'.
(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font
switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most
-circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely
-what you want.)
+circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is what is
+needed.)
'\bf'
Switch to bold face.
@@ -1326,12 +1825,10 @@ sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
-old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package must be
-loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them the
-default. FAQ entry:
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.
+old-style numerals also; sometimes package options are provided to make
+them the default. FAQ entry: <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-osf>.
-4.2 Font sizes
+4.3 Font sizes
==============
The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The
@@ -1352,21 +1849,32 @@ Command '10pt' '11pt' '12pt'
'\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
'\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
- The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by
-declaring them, as with this example.
+ The commands are listed here in declaration (not environment) form,
+since that is how they are typically used. For example.
\begin{quotation} \small
The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao.
\end{quotation}
-The scope of the '\small' lasts until the end of the 'quotation'
+Here, the scope of the '\small' lasts until the end of the 'quotation'
environment. It would also end at the next type style command or the
-end of the current group, so you could enclose it in extra curly braces
-'{\small We are here, we are here, we are here!}'. You can instead use
-the environment form of these commands; for instance,
-'\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
-
-4.3 Low-level font commands
+end of the current group, so you could enclose it in curly braces
+'{\small This text is typeset in the small font.}'.
+
+ An "environment form" of each of these commands is also defined; for
+instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'. However, in practice this form
+can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or end of the
+environment without careful consideration, so it's generally less
+error-prone to stick to the declaration form.
+
+ (Aside: Technically, due to the way LaTeX defines '\begin' and
+'\end', nearly every command that does not take an argument technically
+has an environment form. But in almost all cases, it would only cause
+confusion to use it. The reason for mentioning the environment form of
+the font size declarations specifically is that this particular use is
+not rare.)
+
+4.4 Low-level font commands
===========================
These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
@@ -1385,9 +1893,9 @@ ones.
'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
Select the font family. The web page
- <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
- through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are
- examples of some common families.
+ <https://tug.org/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse through
+ many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are examples of
+ some common families.
'pag' Avant Garde
'fvs' Bitstream Vera Sans
@@ -1470,22 +1978,9 @@ ones.
stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'. The default
'\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
'\fontsize'. Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
- since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see
- '\baselinestretch', next.
-
-'\baselinestretch'
- LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
- '\baselinestretch' parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
- takes effect when '\selectfont' (see below) is called. You can
- make a line skip change happen for the entire document, for
- instance doubling it, by doing
- '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}' in the preamble.
-
- However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
- 'setspace' package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
- options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in
- places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and
- figure captions. See the package documentation.
+ since its value is reset every time a size change happens; instead
+ use '\baselinestretch'. (*note \baselineskip &
+ \baselinestretch::).
'\linespread{FACTOR}'
Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
@@ -1544,22 +2039,22 @@ typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
'\columnsep'
The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with
- a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}' You must change it
- before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+ a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}'. You must change
+ it before the two column mode starts; in the preamble is a good
place.
'\columnseprule'
- The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway
- between the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is
- no rule. Change it with a command such as
- '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column
- environment starts.
+ The width of the rule between columns. The default is 0pt, meaning
+ that there is no rule. Otherwise, the rule appears halfway between
+ the two columns. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column mode
+ starts.
'\columnwidth'
The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
'\textwidth'. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
- of each of the two columns to be half of '\textwidth' minus
- '\columnsep'.
+ of each of the two columns, '\columnwidth', to be half of
+ '\textwidth' minus '\columnsep'.
In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
@@ -1571,7 +2066,7 @@ following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
- exceed '0.7\textheight' . If the height of your starred float
+ exceed '0.7\textheight'. If the height of your starred float
environment exceeds this then you can take one of the following
actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
document:
@@ -1684,8 +2179,8 @@ option (*note Document class options::).
Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
of the main text. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
classes is '25pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: if the
- document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt and 12pt
- it is '0.275in'.
+ document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt or 12pt it
+ is '0.275in'.
'\footskip'
Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
@@ -1729,12 +2224,12 @@ option (*note Document class options::).
'\oddsidemargin'
'\evensidemargin'
- The '\oddsidemargin' is the extra distance between the left side of
- the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
- document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages when
- 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
+ The '\oddsidemargin' length is the extra distance between the left
+ side of the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages
+ when the document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages
+ when 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
- 'evensidemargin'.
+ '\evensidemargin'.
LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
@@ -1797,7 +2292,97 @@ option (*note Document class options::).
of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default
is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.
-5.6 Floats
+5.6 '\baselineskip' & '\baselinestretch'
+========================================
+
+The '\baselineskip' is a rubber length (*note Lengths::). It gives the
+leading, the normal distance between lines in a paragraph, from baseline
+to baseline.
+
+ Ordinarily document authors do not directly change '\baselineskip'
+while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection
+command '\fontsize' (*note low level font commands fontsize::). The
+'\baselineskip''s value is reset every time a font change happens and so
+any direct change to '\baselineskip' would vanish the next time there
+was a font switch. For how to influence line spacing, see the
+discussion of '\baselinestretch' below.
+
+ Usually, a font's size and baseline skip is assigned by the font
+designer. These numbers are nominal in the sense that if, for instance,
+a font's style file has the command '\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}' then that
+does not mean that the characters in the font are 10pt tall; for
+instance, parentheses and accented capitals may be taller. Nor does it
+mean that if the lines are spaced less than 12pt apart then they risk
+touching. Rather these numbers are typographic judgements. (Often, the
+'\baselineskip' is about twenty percent larger than the font size.)
+
+ The '\baselineskip' is not a property of each line but of the entire
+paragraph. As a result, large text in the middle of a paragraph, such
+as a single '{\Huge Q}', will be squashed into its line. TeX will make
+sure it doesn't scrape up against the line above but won't change the
+'\baselineskip' for that one line to make extra room above. For the
+fix, use a '\strut' (*note \strut::).
+
+ The value of '\baselineskip' that TeX uses for the paragraph is the
+value in effect at the blank line or command that ends the paragraph
+unit. So if a document contains this paragraph then its lines will be
+scrunched together, compared to lines in surrounding paragraphs.
+
+ Many people see a page break between text and a displayed equation as
+ bad style, so in effect the display is part of the paragraph.
+ Because this display is in footnotesize, the entire paragraph has the
+ baseline spacing matching that size.
+ {\footnotesize $$a+b = c$$}
+
+ The process for making paragraphs is that when a new line is added,
+if the depth of the previous line plus the height of the new line is
+less than '\baselineskip' then TeX inserts vertical glue to make up the
+difference. There are two fine points. The first is that if the lines
+would be too close together, closer than '\lineskiplimit', then TeX
+instead uses '\lineskip' as the interline glue. The second is that TeX
+doesn't actually use the depth of the previous line. Instead it uses
+'\prevdepth', which usually contains that depth. But at the beginning
+of the paragraph (or any vertical list) or just after a rule,
+'\prevdepth' has the value -1000pt and this special value tells TeX not
+to insert any interline glue at the paragraph start.
+
+ In the standard classes '\lineskiplimit' is 0pt and '\lineskip' is
+1pt. By the prior paragraph then, the distance between lines can
+approach zero but if it becomes zero (or less than zero) then the lines
+jump to 1pt apart.
+
+ Sometimes authors must, for editing purposes, put the document in
+double space or one-and-a-half space. The right way to influence the
+interline distance is via '\baselinestretch'. It scales
+'\baselineskip', and has a default value of 1.0. It is a command, not a
+length, so change the scale factor as in
+'\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.5}\selectfont'.
+
+ The most straightforward way to change the line spacing for an entire
+document is to put '\linespread{FACTOR}' in the preamble. For double
+spacing, take FACTOR to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half spacing use 1.3.
+These number are rough: for instance, since the '\baselineskip' is about
+1.2 times the font size, multiplying by 1.6 gives a font size to
+baseline ratio of about 2. (The '\linespread' command is defined as
+'\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}' so it won't take effect until
+a font setting happens. But that always takes place at the start of a
+document, so there you don't need to follow it with '\selectfont'.)
+
+ A simpler approach is the 'setspace' package. The basic example:
+
+ \usepackage{setspace}
+ \doublespacing % or \onehalfspacing for 1.5
+
+ In the preamble these will start the document off with that sizing.
+But you can also use these declarations in the document body to change
+the spacing from that point forward, and consequently there is
+'\singlespacing' to return the spacing to normal. In the document body,
+a better practice than using the declarations is to use environments,
+such as '\begin{doublespace} ... \end{doublespace}'. The package also
+has commands to do arbitrary spacing: '\setstretch{FACTOR}' and
+'\begin{spacing}{FACTOR} ... \end{spacing}'.
+
+5.7 Floats
==========
Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
@@ -1839,7 +2424,7 @@ below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+ <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat>.
'h'
(Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
@@ -1849,7 +2434,7 @@ below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
'\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
+ <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere>.
'p'
(Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
@@ -1940,12 +2525,12 @@ a command of the form '\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
-suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
-problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explanation of the
-float placement algorithm is in Frank Mittelbach's article "How to
-influence the position of float environments like figure and table in
-LaTeX?" (<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>).
+<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-floats> contains suggestions for relaxing
+LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed
+to the end. A full explanation of the float placement algorithm is in
+Frank Mittelbach's article "How to influence the position of float
+environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
+(<https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf>).
6 Sectioning
************
@@ -1975,9 +2560,9 @@ Subsubsection '\subsubsection' 3
Paragraph '\paragraph' 4
Subparagraph '\subparagraph' 5
- All these commands have a '*'-form that prints TITLE as usual but is
-not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. An
-example of using this is for an appendix in an 'article' . The input
+ All these commands have a '*'-form that prints TITLE as usual but
+does not number it and does not make an entry in the table of contents.
+An example of using this is for an appendix in an 'article'. The input
'\appendix\section{Appendix}' gives the output 'A Appendix' (*note
\appendix::). You can lose the numbering 'A' by instead entering
'\section*{Appendix}' (articles often omit a table of contents and have
@@ -2000,17 +2585,24 @@ contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit (*note
Sectioning/tocdepth::).
LaTeX expects that before you have a '\subsection' you will have a
-'\section' and, in a book, that before a '\section' you will have a
-'\chapter'. Otherwise you can get a something like a subsection
-numbered '3.0.1'.
+'\section' and, in a 'book' class document, that before a '\section' you
+will have a '\chapter'. Otherwise you can get something like a
+subsection numbered '3.0.1'.
- Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands.
+ LaTeX lets you change the appearance of the sectional units. As a
+simple example, you can change the section numbering to upper-case
+letters with '\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}' in the preamble
+(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). CTAN has many
+packages that make this adjustment easier, notably 'titlesec'.
+
+ Two counters relate to the appearance of headings made by sectioning
+commands.
'secnumdepth'
- Controls which sectioning commands are numbered. Suppress
- numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than LEVEL
- '\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}' (*note \setcounter::). See the
- above table for the level numbers. For instance, if the
+ Controls which sectioning unit are numbered. Setting the counter
+ with '\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}' will suppress numbering of
+ sectioning at any depth greater than LEVEL (*note \setcounter::).
+ See the above table for the level numbers. For instance, if the
'secnumdepth' is 1 in an 'article' then a '\section{Introduction}'
command will produce output like '1 Introduction' while
'\subsection{Discussion}' will produce output like 'Discussion',
@@ -2023,8 +2615,8 @@ numbered '3.0.1'.
sectioning units at LEVEL be the smallest ones listed (*note
\setcounter::). See the above table for the level numbers. For
instance, if 'tocdepth' is 1 then the table of contents will list
- sections but not subsections. LaTeX's default 'secnumdepth' is 3
- in 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
+ sections but not subsections. LaTeX's default 'tocdepth' is 3 in
+ 'article' class and 2 in the 'book' and 'report' classes.
6.1 '\part'
===========
@@ -2071,7 +2663,7 @@ in the table of contents.
For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
in the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 (*note
-Sectioning/secnumdepth:: and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
+Sectioning/secnumdepth::, and *note Sectioning/tocdepth::).
In the class 'article', if a paragraph immediately follows the part
title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package
@@ -2129,7 +2721,7 @@ but only 'Weyl' on the contents page. This puts a line break in the
title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits the
break in the contents
- \chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
+ \chapter[Given it all; my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
in the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 (*note
@@ -2278,19 +2870,19 @@ its line and flush left, in boldface and a larger type (the type size is
'\large'). The same holds in 'article' except that there are no
chapters in that class so it looks like '2.3 TITLE'.
- The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the section number,
-does not increment the 'section' counter, and produces no table of
-contents entry.
+ The '*' form shows TITLE. But it does not show the subsection
+number, does not increment the 'subsection' counter, and produces no
+table of contents entry.
- The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the section title in
-the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
-present then TITLE will be there. This shows the full name in the title
-of the section,
+ The optional argument TOC-TITLE will appear as the subsection title
+in the table of contents (*note Table of contents etc.::). If it is not
+present then TITLE will be there. This shows the full text in the title
+of the subsection,
\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of
Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow}
-but only 'U+03B1,U+03B2,U+03B3 paper' on the contents page.
+but only 'α,β,γ paper' on the contents page.
For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear
in the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2 (*note
@@ -2404,23 +2996,26 @@ article resets the 'section' and 'subsection' counters.
the first two will generate output numbered 'Chapter 1' and 'Chapter 2'.
After the '\appendix' the numbering will be 'Appendix A' and 'Appendix
-B'. *Note Larger book template:: for another example.
+B'. *Note Larger book template::, for another example.
The 'appendix' package adds the command '\appendixpage' to put a
separate 'Appendices' in the document body before the first appendix,
and the command '\addappheadtotoc' to do the same in the table of
-contents. You can reset the name 'Appendix' with a command like
+contents. You can reset the name 'Appendices' with a command like
'\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}', as well as a number of
other features. See the documentation on CTAN.
6.7 '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', '\backmatter'
================================================
-Synopsis, one of:
+Synopsis, one or more of:
\frontmatter
+ ...
\mainmatter
+ ...
\backmatter
+ ...
Format a 'book' class document differently according to which part of
the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
@@ -2432,17 +3027,22 @@ front matter pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not
numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary,
notes, a bibliography, and an index.
- The '\frontmatter' declaration makes the pages numbered in lowercase
+ The '\frontmatter' command makes the pages numbered in lowercase
roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter's title
appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands
-here, use the '*'-version (*note Sectioning::). The '\mainmatter'
-changes the behavior back to the expected version, and resets the page
-number. The '\backmatter' leaves the page numbering alone but switches
-the chapters back to being not numbered. *Note Larger book template::
-for an example using the three.
+here, use the '*'-version (*note Sectioning::).
-6.8 '\@startsection'
-====================
+ The '\mainmatter' command changes the behavior back to the expected
+version, and resets the page number.
+
+ The '\backmatter' command leaves the page numbering alone but
+switches the chapters back to being not numbered.
+
+ *Note Larger book template::, for an example using these three
+commands.
+
+6.8 '\@startsection', typesetting sectional unit headings
+=========================================================
Synopsis:
@@ -2476,11 +3076,11 @@ so that issuing
{AFTERSKIP}
{STYLE}}
-redefines '\section' to have the form '\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (here
-too, the star '*' is optional). *Note Sectioning::. This implies that
-when you write a command like '\renewcommand{section}{...}', the
-'\@startsection{...}' must come last in the definition. See the
-examples below.
+redefines '\section' while keeping its standard calling form
+'\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}' (in which, for reminder, the star '*' is
+optional). *Note Sectioning::. This implies that when you write a
+command like '\renewcommand{\section}{...}', the '\@startsection{...}'
+must come last in the definition. See the examples below.
NAME
Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This
@@ -2494,7 +3094,7 @@ NAME
LEVEL
An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. *Note
- Sectioning:: for the list of standard level numbers.
+ Sectioning::, for the list of standard level numbers.
If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter
'secnumdepth' then titles for this sectioning command will be
@@ -2520,7 +3120,7 @@ BEFORESKIP
The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space
will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
- top of a fresh page. If this number is negative then the first
+ beginning of a page. If this number is negative then the first
paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
negative of '1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt' is '-1pt plus -2pt minus
@@ -2579,19 +3179,23 @@ STYLE
These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
are defined with '\@startsection', for the 'article', 'book', and
-'report' classes. For section, the LEVEL is 1, the INDENT is 0pt, the
-BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '2.3ex
-plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is '\normalfont\Large\bfseries'. For
-subsection, the LEVEL is 2, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is
-'-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex',
-and the STYLE is '\normalfont\large\bfseries'. For subsubsection, the
-LEVEL is 3, the INDENT is 0pt, the BEFORESKIP is '-3.25ex plus -1ex
-minus -0.2ex', the AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex', and the STYLE is
-'\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'.
-
- Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in
-the preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble they
-must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
+'report' classes.
+
+ * For 'section': LEVEL is 1, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is '-3.5ex
+ plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', AFTERSKIP is '2.3ex plus 0.2ex', and STYLE
+ is '\normalfont\Large\bfseries'.
+
+ * For 'subsection': LEVEL is 2, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is '-3.25ex
+ plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex', and STYLE
+ is '\normalfont\large\bfseries'.
+
+ * For 'subsubsection': LEVEL is 3, INDENT is 0pt, BEFORESKIP is
+ '-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex', AFTERSKIP is '1.5ex plus 0.2ex',
+ and STYLE is '\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries'.
+
+ Some examples follow. These go either in a package or class file or
+in the preamble of a LaTeX document. If you put them in the preamble
+they must go between a '\makeatletter' command and a '\makeatother'.
(Probably the error message 'You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical
mode.' means that you forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter &
\makeatother::.
@@ -2791,6 +3395,61 @@ document would have to be compiled twice.
The 'cleveref' package includes text such as 'Theorem' in the
reference. See the documentation on CTAN.
+7.4 'xr' package
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage{xr}
+ \externaldocument{DOCUMENT-BASENAME}
+
+ or
+
+ \usepackage{xr}
+ \externaldocument[REFERENCE-PREFIX]{DOCUMENT-BASENAME}
+
+ Make cross references to the external document
+'DOCUMENT-BASENAME.tex'.
+
+ Here is an example. If 'lectures.tex' has this in the preamble
+
+ \usepackage{xr}
+ \externaldocument{exercises}
+ \externaldocument[H-]{hints}
+ \externaldocument{answers}
+
+ then it can use cross reference labels from the other three
+documents. Suppose that 'exercises.tex' has an enumerated list
+containing this,
+
+ \item \label{exer:EulersThm} What if every vertex has odd degree?
+
+ and 'hints.tex' has an enumerated list with this,
+
+ \item \label{exer:EulersThm} Distinguish the case of two vertices.
+
+ and 'answers.tex' has an enumerated list with this.
+
+ \item \label{ans:EulersThm} There is no Euler path, except if there
+ are exactly two vertices.
+
+ After compiling the exercises, hints, and answers documents, entering
+this in the body of 'lectures.tex' will result in the lectures getting
+the reference numbers used in the other documents.
+
+ See Exercise~\ref{exer:EulersThm}, with Hint~\ref{H-exer:EulersThm}.
+ The solution is Answer~\ref{ans:EulersThm}.
+
+ The prefix 'H-' for the reference from the hints file is needed
+because the label in the hints file is the same as the label in the
+exercises file. Without that prefix, both references would get the
+number from the later file.
+
+ Note: if the document uses the 'hyperref' package then in place of
+'xr', put '\usepackage{xr-hyper}' before the '\usepackage{hyperref}'.
+Also, if any of the multiple documents uses 'hyperref' then they all
+must use it.
+
8 Environments
**************
@@ -2969,7 +3628,7 @@ ending.
\begin{center}
My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
- I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+ I grew up in that belief. ---Richard Burton
\end{center}
A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
@@ -3040,10 +3699,10 @@ none causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
definitions.
- \begin{definition}
+ \begin{description}
\item[lama] A priest.
\item[llama] A beast.
- \end{definition}
+ \end{description}
The labels 'lama' and 'llama' are output in boldface, with the left edge
on the left margin.
@@ -3085,9 +3744,9 @@ Synopsis:
MATHEMATICAL TEXT
\end{displaymath}
- Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
-style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global
-option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
+ Environment to typeset the MATHEMATICAL TEXT on its own line, in
+display style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the
+global option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
@@ -3099,17 +3758,17 @@ environment (*note equation::).
displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways
in that package for having math text broken across lines.
- The construct '\[MATH TEXT\]' is essentially a synonym for
-'\begin{displaymath}MATH TEXT\end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier
-to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a square
-bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely
-be unique. (The construct '$$MATH TEXT$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
+ The construct '\[MATH\]' is a synonym for the environment
+'\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}' but the latter is easier to
+work with in the source; for instance, searching for a square bracket
+may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will likely be
+unique.
+
+ (Aside: The construct '$$MATH$$' from Plain TeX is sometimes
mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a synonym,
-because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't started in
-math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
-environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
-vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
-'fleqn' option.)
+and is not officially supported in LaTeX at all; '$$' doesn't support
+the 'fleqn' option (*note Document class options::), has different
+vertical spacing, and doesn't perform consistency checks.)
The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
@@ -3231,7 +3890,7 @@ with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.
The 'eqnarray' environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including
spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See
"Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
-<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
+<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment. We
include a description only for completeness and for working with old
@@ -3357,39 +4016,53 @@ end of the document, on a page of floats.
\caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
\end{figure}
-8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
-===========================================
+8.11 'filecontents'
+===================
Synopsis:
- \begin{filecontents}{FILENAME}
+ \begin{filecontents}[OPTION]{FILENAME}
TEXT
\end{filecontents}
or
- \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
+ \begin{filecontents*}[OPTION]{FILENAME}
TEXT
\end{filecontents*}
- Create a file named FILENAME and fill it with TEXT. The unstarred
-version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the content of the
-created file with a header; see the example below. The starred version
-'filecontents*' does not include the header.
+ Create a file named FILENAME in the current directory (or the output
+directory, if specified; *note output directory::) and write TEXT to it.
+By default, an existing file is not overwritten.
- This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
-often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is typically used
-when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
-environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
-and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
-'bib' references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
+ The unstarred version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the
+content of the created file with a header of TeX comments; see the
+example below. The starred version 'filecontents*' does not include the
+header.
+
+ The possible options are:
- The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and
-if so, does not do anything. There is a 'filecontents' package that
-redefines the 'filecontents' environment so that instead of doing
-nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
+'force'
+'overwrite'
+ Overwrite an existing file.
- For example, this document
+'noheader'
+ Omit the header. Equivalent to using 'filecontents*'.
+
+'nosearch'
+ Only check the current directory (and the output directory, if
+ specified) for an existing file, not the entire search path.
+
+ These options were added in a 2019 release of LaTeX.
+
+ This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
+often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is commonly used
+to create a '.bib' or other such data file from the main document
+source, to make the source file self-contained. Similarly, it can be
+used to create a custom style or class file, again making the source
+self-contained.
+
+ For example, this document:
\documentclass{article}
\begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
@@ -3400,7 +4073,7 @@ nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
Article by \myname.
\end{document}
-produces this file 'JH.sty'.
+produces this file 'JH.sty':
%% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
%% generated by the `filecontents' environment
@@ -3422,8 +4095,9 @@ Synopsis:
An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long
then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and
-stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double
-backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note \raggedright::.
+stretching or shrinking interword spaces. To force a new line use a
+double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note
+\raggedright::.
This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the
text flush left and ragged right.
@@ -3450,7 +4124,7 @@ or
\end{ENVIRONMENT}
A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and
-ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or
+ragged right. It can be used inside an ENVIRONMENT such as 'quote' or
in a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
@@ -3481,11 +4155,13 @@ awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note that
An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the
right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long
to fit the margins then LaTeX will linebreak them in a way that avoids
-hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use
-a double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form see *note
-\raggedleft::.
+hyphenation and stretching or shrinking inter-word spaces. To force a
+new line use a double backslash, '\\'. For the declaration form
+see *note \raggedleft::.
- For an example related to this environment, see *note flushleft::.
+ For an example related to this environment, see *note flushleft::,
+where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace 'flushleft' by
+'flushright'.
8.13.1 '\raggedleft'
--------------------
@@ -3501,7 +4177,7 @@ or
\end{ENVIRONMENT}
A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and
-ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
+ragged left. It can be used inside an ENVIRONMENT such as 'quote' or in
a 'parbox'. For the environment form see *note flushright::.
Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
@@ -3510,7 +4186,9 @@ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
paragraph unit.
- For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::.
+ For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::,
+where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace '\raggedright' by
+'\raggedleft'.
8.14 'itemize'
==============
@@ -3523,9 +4201,9 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{itemize}
- Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list.
-The environment must have at least one '\item'; having none causes the
-LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
+ Produce an "unordered list", sometimes called a bullet list. There
+must be at least one '\item' within the environment; having none causes
+the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
This gives a two-item list.
@@ -3534,28 +4212,32 @@ LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'.
\item Rice portrait
\end{itemize}
-As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, *. The
-format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below.
+With the default locale--without loading e.g. 'babel' package with
+another language than USenglish--as a top-level list each label would
+come out as a bullet, *. The format of the labeling depends on the
+nesting level; see below.
Start list items with the '\item' command (*note \item::). If you
give '\item' an optional argument by following it with square brackets,
-as in '\item[Optional label]', then by default it will appear in bold
-and be flush right, so it could extend into the left margin. For labels
-that are flush left see the *note description:: environment. Following
-the '\item' is optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
+as in '\item[OPTIONAL LABEL]', then by default OPTIONAL LABEL will
+appear in bold and be flush right, so it could extend into the left
+margin. For labels that are flush left see the *note description::
+environment. Following the '\item' is the text of the item, which may
+be empty or contain multiple paragraphs.
- Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels
+ Unordered lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels
deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
-environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::). The 'itemize'
-environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through '\labelitemiv' to
-produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase
-roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting
-level). These are the default marks at each level.
+environments, such as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::).
+
+ The 'itemize' environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through
+'\labelitemiv' to produce the default label (note the convention of
+lowercase roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify
+the nesting level). These are the default marks at each level.
1. * (bullet, from '\textbullet')
2. -- (bold en-dash, from '\normalfont\bfseries\textendash')
3. * (asterisk, from '\textasteriskcentered')
- 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period, from
+ 4. . (vertically centered dot, rendered here as a period, from
'\textperiodcentered')
Change the labels with '\renewcommand'. For instance, this makes the
@@ -3565,15 +4247,16 @@ first level use diamonds.
The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
the left margin of the 'itemize' list is determined by the parameters
-'\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'. (Note the convention of using
-lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the
-nesting level.) The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em' in
-two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and '1.7em'
-in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
+'\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi'. (This also uses the convention
+of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to
+denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: '2.5em' in level 1 ('2em'
+in two-column mode), '2.2em' in level 2, '1.87em' in level 3, and
+'1.7em' in level 4, with smaller values for more deeply nested levels.
For other major LaTeX labeled list environments, see *note
-description:: and *note enumerate::. For information about list layout
-parameters, including the default values, and for information about
+description:: and *note enumerate::. The 'itemize', 'enumerate' and
+'description' environment use the same list layout parameters. For a
+description, including the default values, and for information about
customizing list layout, see *note list::. The package 'enumitem' is
useful for customizing lists.
@@ -3645,9 +4328,10 @@ of list items. It can contain text and LaTeX commands, as above where
it contains both 'Item' and '\Roman{...}'. LaTeX forms the label by
putting the LABELING argument in a box of width '\labelwidth'. If the
label is wider than that, the additional material extends to the right.
-When making an instance of a list you can override the default labeling
-by giving '\item' an optional argument by including square braces and
-the text, as in the above '\item[Special label.]'; *note \item::.
+When making an instance of a 'list' you can override the default
+labeling by giving '\item' an optional argument by including square
+braces and the text, as in the above '\item[Special label.]'; *note
+\item::.
The mandatory second argument SPACING has a list of commands. This
list can be empty. A command that can go in here is
@@ -3664,7 +4348,7 @@ Modes::). One example of changing its definition is that to the above
'named' example, before the definition of the environment add
'\newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}', and between the
'\setlength' command and the parenthesis that closes the SPACING
-argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'. Then the items will
+argument also add '\let\makelabel\namedmakelabel'. Then the labels will
be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to
'\let\makelabel\fbox' puts the labels inside a framed box. Another
example of the '\makelabel' command is below, in the definition of the
@@ -3691,7 +4375,7 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
'\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that
is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 11 point are: '4.5pt
plus2pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'), and
- 'topsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12
+ '\topsep' (that is, '2pt plus1pt minus1pt'). The defaults at 12
point are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '\parsep' (that is, '2.5pt
plus1pt minus1pt'), and '\topsep' (that is, '2.5pt plus1pt
minus1pt').
@@ -3745,13 +4429,13 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
is '0pt'.
'\parsep'
- Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the 'book'
- and 'article' classes The defaults for the first three levels in
- LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report' classes at 10 point size
- are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
- The defaults at 11 point size are: '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt
- plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults at 12 point size are:
- '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'.
+ Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. The defaults for
+ the first three levels in LaTeX's 'article', 'book', and 'report'
+ classes at 10 point size are: '4pt plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults at 11 point size are: '4.5pt
+ plus2pt minus1pt', '2pt plus1pt minus1pt', and '0pt'. The defaults
+ at 12 point size are: '5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt', '2.5pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt', and '0pt'.
'\partopsep'
Vertical space added, beyond '\topsep'+'\parskip', to the top and
@@ -3887,7 +4571,7 @@ edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. *Note
\let\makelabel=\makeredlabel
}
}
- {\end{list} }
+ {\end{list}}
8.16.1 '\item': An entry in a list
----------------------------------
@@ -3904,7 +4588,7 @@ or
default depends on the list type.
Because the optional label is surrounded by square brackets '[...]',
-if you have an item whose text starts with '[', you have to hide the
+if you have an item whose text starts with [, you have to hide the
bracket inside curly braces, as in: '\item {[} is an open square
bracket'; otherwise, LaTeX will think it marks the start of an optional
label.
@@ -3938,7 +4622,7 @@ Synopsis:
A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are
not indented and an '\item' without an optional argument produces no
text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
-the '\item' command as part of the environment's definition. For
+the '\item' command is part of the environment's definition. For
instance, the 'center' environment is defined essentially like this:
\newenvironment{center}
@@ -4014,24 +4698,24 @@ gives the width of the box into which CONTENTS are typeset.
There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
You need not include all three. For example, get the default POSITION
-and set the HEIGHT with '\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] CONTENTS
-\end{minipage}'. (Get the natural height with an empty argument, '[]'.)
+and set the HEIGHT with '\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm]{\columnwidth}
+CONTENTS \end{minipage}'. (Get the natural height with an empty
+argument, '[]'.)
The optional argument POSITION governs how the 'minipage' vertically
aligns with the surrounding material.
'c'
(synonym 'm') Default. Positions the 'minipage' so its vertical
- center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what
- Plain TeX calls '\vcenter').
+ center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line.
't'
Match the top line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
- surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vtop'.
+ surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vtop').
'b'
Match the bottom line in the 'minipage' with the baseline of the
- surrounding text (Plain TeX's '\vbox'.
+ surrounding text (plain TeX's '\vbox').
To see the effects of these, contrast running this
@@ -4048,11 +4732,11 @@ will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of
zero or a negative value.
The final optional argument INNER-POS controls the placement of
-CONTENT inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default
+CONTENTS inside the box. These are the possible values are (the default
is the value of POSITION).
't'
- Place CONTENT at the top of the box.
+ Place CONTENTS at the top of the box.
'c'
Place it in the vertical center.
@@ -4110,19 +4794,26 @@ Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next
This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic.
They are vertically centered.
+ % siunitx to have the S column specifier,
+ % which aligns numbers on their decimal point.
+ \usepackage{siunitx}
\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}}
...
\begin{center}
\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}}
\hspace{0.1\textwidth}
\begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth}
- \begin{tabular}{r|l}
- \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million) \\ \hline
- The Bronx &$1.5$ \\
- Brooklyn &$2.6$ \\
- Manhattan &$1.6$ \\
- Queens &$2.3$ \\
- Staten Island &$0.5$
+ \begin{tabular}{r|S}
+ % \multicolumn to remove vertical bar between column headers
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &
+ % braces to prevent siunitx from misinterpreting the
+ % period as a decimal separator
+ {Pop. (million)} \\ \hline
+ The Bronx &1.5 \\
+ Brooklyn &2.6 \\
+ Manhattan &1.6 \\
+ Queens &2.3 \\
+ Staten Island &0.5
\end{tabular}
\end{minipage}
\end{center}
@@ -4132,22 +4823,25 @@ They are vertically centered.
Synopses:
\begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)
- PICTURE COMMANDS
+ PICTURE COMMAND
\end{picture}
or
\begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
- PICTURE COMMANDS
+ PICTURE COMMAND
\end{picture}
+Where there may be any number of PICTURE COMMAND's.
+
An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
-boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not
-obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics
-creation systems, such as 'TikZ', 'PSTricks', 'MetaPost', or
-'Asymptote'. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN.
+boxes, circles, and text. This environment is not obsolete, but new
+documents typically use much more powerful graphics creation systems,
+such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or Asymptote. None of these are
+covered in this document; see CTAN.
- This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors.
+ To start, here's an example showing the parallelogram law for adding
+vectors.
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
\begin{picture}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall
@@ -4155,39 +4849,23 @@ creation systems, such as 'TikZ', 'PSTricks', 'MetaPost', or
\put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}}
\put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}}
\put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}}
- \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}}
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,1){6}}
\put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }}
\end{picture}
- You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
-exact location.
-
- \usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble
- ...
- \begin{center}
- \setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
- \begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
- \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
- \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
- \end{picture}
- \end{center}
-
-The red X will be precisely a quarter of the '\linewidth' from the left
-margin, and '0.35\linewidth' up from the bottom. Another example of
-this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get repeat
-material on each of a document's pages.
-
The 'picture' environment has one required argument, a pair of
-numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT). Multiply these by the value '\unitlength' to
-get the nominal size of the output, the space that LaTeX reserves on the
-output page. This nominal size need not be how large the picture really
-is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture outside the picture's box.
+positive real numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT). Multiply these by the value
+'\unitlength' to get the nominal size of the output, i.e. the space that
+LaTeX reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
+large the picture really is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture
+outside the picture's box.
This environment also has an optional argument (XOFFSET,YOFFSET). It
is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one
is not contained in square brackets. As with the required argument, it
-consists of two real numbers. Multiply these by '\unitlength' to get
-the point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
+consists of a pair of two real numbers, but these may also be negative
+or null. Multiply these by '\unitlength' to get the coordinates of the
+point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
@@ -4201,25 +4879,28 @@ the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
optional argument.
- Each PICTURE COMMAND tells LaTeX where to put something by naming its
-position. A "position" is a pair such as '(2.4,-5)' giving the x- and
-y-coordinates. A "coordinate" is a not a length, it is a real number
-(it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a length in
-multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if '\unitlength' has been
-set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
-centimeters.
+ Each PICTURE COMMAND tells LaTeX where to put something by providing
+its position. A "position" is a pair such as '(2.4,-5)' giving the x-
+and y-coordinates. A "coordinate" is a not a length, it is a real
+number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It specifies a
+length in multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if
+'\unitlength' has been set to '1cm', then the coordinate '2.54'
+specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
- LaTeX's default for '\unitlength' is '1pt'. it is a rigid length
+ LaTeX's default for '\unitlength' is '1pt'. It is a rigid length
(*note Lengths::). Change it with the '\setlength' command (*note
\setlength::). Make this change only outside of a 'picture'
environment.
- Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at
-the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears
-as an argument, as with '\put(1,2){...}', it is not enclosed in braces
-since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, unlike in
-some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are further up the
-page.
+ The 'picture' environment supports using standard arithmetic
+expressions as well as numbers.
+
+ Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is by default
+at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position
+appears as an argument, as with '\put(1,2){...}', it is not enclosed in
+braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also,
+unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are
+further up the page, for example, y = 1 is _above_ y = 0.
There are four ways to put things in a picture: '\put', '\multiput',
'\qbezier', and '\graphpaper'. The most often used is '\put'. This
@@ -4246,20 +4927,23 @@ length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of 1.)
The '\multiput', 'qbezier', and 'graphpaper' commands are described
below.
- This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using '\qbezier' for that
-curve.
+ You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an
+exact location. For example:
- \begin{picture}(3,1.5)
- \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis
- \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis
- \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle
- \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side
- \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
- \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
- \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
- \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
- \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+ \usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \begin{center}
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth}
+ \begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall
+ \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}}
+ \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}}
\end{picture}
+ \end{center}
+
+The red X will be precisely a quarter of the '\textwidth' from the left
+margin, and '0.35\textwidth' up from the bottom of the picture. Another
+example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
+repeat material on each of a document's pages.
8.19.1 '\put'
-------------
@@ -4327,6 +5011,21 @@ curve's tangent line at (1,0).
points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of
points is '\qbeziermax' (change this value with '\renewcommand').
+ This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using '\qbezier' for that
+curve.
+
+ \begin{picture}(8,4)
+ \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis
+ \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis
+ \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side
+ \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side
+ \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25)
+ \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5)
+ \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick
+ \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}}
+ \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}}
+ \end{picture}
+
8.19.4 '\graphpaper'
--------------------
@@ -4359,7 +5058,7 @@ Synopsis:
\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises Y_RISE for
-every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change -- it
+every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change--it
is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
case of vertical lines, where (X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), the TRAVEL gives the
change in y.
@@ -4390,9 +5089,10 @@ values from -6 through 6. Also, they must be relatively prime, so that
(X_RUN,Y_RISE) can be (2,1) but not (4,2) (if you choose the latter then
instead of lines you get sequences of arrowheads; the solution is to
switch to the former). To get lines of arbitrary slope and plenty of
-other shapes in a system like 'picture', see the package 'pict2e' on
-CTAN. Another solution is to use a full-featured graphics system such as
-'TikZ', or 'PSTricks', or 'MetaPost', or 'Asymptote'
+other shapes in a system like 'picture', see the package 'pict2e'
+(<https://ctan.org/pkg/pict2e>). Another solution is to use a
+full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or
+Asymptote.
8.19.6 '\linethickness'
-----------------------
@@ -4437,9 +5137,9 @@ specified one. The '*' form produces a filled-in circle.
\put(5,7){\circle{6}}
- The available radii for 'circle' are, in points, the even numbers
-from 2 to 20, inclusive. For 'circle*' they are all the integers from 1
-to 15.
+ The available radii for '\circle' are, in points, the even numbers
+from 2 to 20, inclusive. For '\circle*' they are all the integers from
+1 to 15.
8.19.10 '\oval'
---------------
@@ -4528,7 +5228,7 @@ Synopsis:
Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
vertically rises Y_RISE for every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the
-total horizontal change -- it is not the length of the vector, it is the
+total horizontal change--it is not the length of the vector, it is the
change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if
(X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), then TRAVEL gives the change in y.
@@ -4708,12 +5408,12 @@ not be known in advance.
widths, ended by a '\kill' command (which is described below):
\begin{tabbing}
- \hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill
- Ship \> Guns \> Year \\
- \textit{Sophie} \> 14 \> 1800 \\
- \textit{Polychrest} \> 24 \> 1803 \\
- \textit{Lively} \> 38 \> 1804 \\
- \textit{Surprise} \> 28 \> 1805 \\
+ \hspace{1.2in}\=\hspace{1in}\=\kill
+ Ship \>Guns \>Year \\
+ \textit{Sophie} \>14 \>1800 \\
+ \textit{Polychrest} \>24 \>1803 \\
+ \textit{Lively} \>38 \>1804 \\
+ \textit{Surprise} \>28 \>1805 \\
\end{tabbing}
Both the 'tabbing' environment and the more widely-used 'tabular'
@@ -4722,21 +5422,21 @@ in 'tabular' the width of columns is determined automatically by LaTeX,
while in 'tabbing' the user sets the tab stops. Another distinction is
that 'tabular' generates a box, but 'tabbing' can be broken across
pages. Finally, while 'tabular' can be used in any mode, 'tabbing' can
-be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph.
+be used only in paragraph mode and it always starts a new paragraph,
+without indentation.
- A 'tabbing' environment always starts a new paragraph, without
-indentation. Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need
-to use the starred form of the '\hspace' command at the beginning of a
-tabbed row. The right margin of the 'tabbing' environment is the end of
-line, so that the width of the environment is '\linewidth'.
+ Moreover, as shown in the example above, there is no need to use the
+starred form of the '\hspace' command at the beginning of a tabbed row.
+The right margin of the 'tabbing' environment is the end of line, so
+that the width of the environment is '\linewidth'.
The 'tabbing' environment contains a sequence of "tabbed rows". The
first tabbed row begins immediately after '\begin{tabbing}' and each row
ends with '\\' or '\kill'. The last row may omit the '\\' and end with
just '\end{tabbing}'.
- At any point the 'tabbing' environment has a current tab stop
-pattern, a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These
+ At any point the 'tabbing' environment has a "current tab stop
+pattern", a sequence of N > 0 tab stops, numbered 0, 1, etc. These
create N corresponding columns. Tab stop 0 is always the left margin,
defined by the enclosing environment. Tab stop number I is set if it is
assigned a horizontal position on the page. Tab stop number I can only
@@ -4867,20 +5567,18 @@ following page.
\label{tab:cello}
\end{table}
-but you can put many different kinds of content in a 'table', including
-text, LaTeX commands, etc.
+but you can put many different kinds of content in a 'table': the TABLE
+BODY may contain text, LaTeX commands, graphics, etc. It is typeset in
+a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth'.
For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
- The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth'. It
-can contain text, commands, graphics, etc.
-
The label is optional; it is used for cross references (*note Cross
references::). The '\caption' command is also optional. It specifies
-caption text for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional
-LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in the list of tables instead
-of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
+caption text TITLE for the table. By default it is numbered. If its
+optional LOTTITLE is present then that text is used in the list of
+tables instead of TITLE (*note Table of contents etc.::).
In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
@@ -5030,8 +5728,8 @@ COLS
(when used in a 'p'-column element these declarations must
appear inside braces, as with '{\centering .. \\ ..}').
Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double backslash as
- ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use
- '\newline' (*note \newline::).
+ ending the tabular row. Instead, to get a line break in there
+ use '\newline' (*note \newline::).
'*{NUM}{COLS}'
Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
@@ -5233,7 +5931,7 @@ Synopsis:
Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to
produce bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have
only a few references and can maintain the list by hand. *Note Using
-BibTeX:: for a more sophisticated approach.
+BibTeX::, for a more sophisticated approach.
This shows the environment with two entries.
@@ -5251,10 +5949,10 @@ BibTeX:: for a more sophisticated approach.
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
\end{thebibliography}
-This styles the first reference as '[1] Leslie ...', and so that
-'\cite{latexdps}' produces the matching '... based on [1]'. The second
-'\cite' produces '[1, 2]'. You must compile the document twice to
-resolve these references.
+This styles the first reference as '[1] Leslie ...', and so that '...
+based on \cite{latexdps}' produces the matching '... based on [1]'. The
+second '\cite' produces '[1, 2]'. You must compile the document twice
+to resolve these references.
The mandatory argument WIDEST-LABEL is text that, when typeset, is as
wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. The
@@ -5267,12 +5965,14 @@ where the top level sectioning is '\chapter' and the default title is
'Bibliography', that title is in the macro '\bibname'. For 'article',
where the class's top level sectioning is '\section' and the default is
'References', the title is in macro '\refname'. Change it by redefining
-the command, as with '\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}' after
+the command, as with '\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}', after
'\begin{document}'.
Language support packages such as 'babel' will automatically redefine
'\refname' or '\bibname' to fit the selected language.
+ *Note list::, for the list layout control parameters.
+
8.24.1 '\bibitem'
-----------------
@@ -5284,15 +5984,14 @@ or
\bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
- Generate an entry labeled by LABEL. The default is for LaTeX to
-generates a number using the 'enumi' counter. The "citation key"
-CITE_KEY is a string of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but
-not comma).
+ Generate an entry labeled by default by a number generated using the
+'enumi' counter. The "citation key" CITE_KEY can be any string of
+letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma).
- *Note thebibliography:: for an example.
+ *Note thebibliography::, for an example.
- The optional LABEL changes the default label from an integer to the
-given string. With this
+ When provided, the optional LABEL becomes the entry label and the
+'enumi' counter is not incremented. With this
\begin{thebibliography}
\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps}
@@ -5320,13 +6019,13 @@ it is the second entry.
were multiply-defined labels'.
Under the hood, LaTeX remembers the CITE_KEY and LABEL information
-because '\bibitem' writes it to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'. For
-instance, the above example causes '\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}'
-and '\bibcite{texbook}{1}' to appear in that file. The '.aux' file is
-read by the '\begin{document}' command and then the information is
-available for '\cite' commands. This explains why you need to run LaTeX
-twice to resolve references: once to write it out and once to read it
-in.
+because '\bibitem' writes it to the auxiliary file 'JOBNAME.aux' (*note
+Jobname::). For instance, the above example causes the two
+'\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993}' and '\bibcite{texbook}{1}' to appear
+in that file. The '.aux' file is read by the '\begin{document}' command
+and then the information is available for '\cite' commands. This
+explains why you need to run LaTeX twice to resolve references: once to
+write it out and once to read it in.
Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a '\bibitem' or
change its CITE_KEY you may get 'LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have
@@ -5358,19 +6057,20 @@ citation keys (*note \bibitem::).
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983.
\end{thebibliography}
-produces output like '... source is [1]'. (You can change the
-appearance of the citation with bibliography styles. More is in *note
-Using BibTeX::.)
+produces output like '... source is [1]'. You can change the appearance
+of the citation and of the reference by using bibliography styles if you
+generate automatically the 'thebibliography' environment. More
+information in *note Using BibTeX::.
The optional argument SUBCITE is appended to the citation. For
example, 'See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook}' might produce 'See 14.3 in
[1, p. 314]'.
In addition to what appears in the output, '\cite' writes information
-to the auxiliary file 'FILENAME.aux'. For instance, '\cite{latexdps}'
-writes '\citation{latexdps}' to that file. This information is used by
-BibTeX to include in your reference list only those works that you have
-actually cited; see *note \nocite:: also.
+to the auxiliary file 'JOBNAME.aux' (*note Jobname::). For instance,
+'\cite{latexdps}' writes '\citation{latexdps}' to that file. This
+information is used by BibTeX to include in your reference list only
+those works that you have actually cited; see *note \nocite:: also.
If KEYS is not in your bibliography information then you get 'LaTeX
Warning: There were undefined references', and in the output the
@@ -5389,12 +6089,12 @@ Synopsis:
\nocite{KEYS}
Produces no output but writes KEYS to the auxiliary file
-'DOC-FILENAME.aux'.
+'JOBNAME.aux' (*note Jobname::).
The mandatory argument KEYS is a comma-separated list of one or more
citation keys (*note \bibitem::). This information is used by BibTeX to
include these works in your reference list even though you have not
-cited them (*note \cite::).
+explicitly cited them (*note \cite::).
8.24.4 Using BibTeX
-------------------
@@ -5402,7 +6102,7 @@ cited them (*note \cite::).
As described in 'thebibliography' (*note thebibliography::), a
sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
-documentation on CTAN.
+documentation on CTAN (*note CTAN::).
With BibTeX, you don't use 'thebibliography' (*note
thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines.
@@ -5426,7 +6126,7 @@ are:
Many, many other BibTeX style files exist, tailored to the demands of
various publications. See CTAN's listing
-<http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
+<https://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib>.
The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to
@@ -5547,8 +6247,13 @@ string '\end{verbatim}'.
You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros,
for instance in the argument to a '\section'. This is not the same as
-commands being fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear
-there. (But the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+commands being fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot work,
+as the 'verbatim' environment changes the catcode regime before
+processing its contents, and restore it immediately afterward,
+nevertheless with a macro argument the content of the argument has
+already be converted to a token list along the catcode regime in effect
+when the macro was called. However, the 'cprotect' package can help
+with this.
One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There
are packages that are an improvement the 'verbatim' environment. For
@@ -5559,7 +6264,7 @@ files, or parts of those files. Such packages include 'listings', and
A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments
is 'fancyvrb'. Another is 'verbatimbox'.
- For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN.
+ For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (*note CTAN::).
8.27.1 '\verb'
--------------
@@ -5581,7 +6286,7 @@ The first '\verb' has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
point, '!'. The second instead uses plus, '+', because the exclamation
point is part of 'literal-text'.
- The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT -- it must
+ The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT--it must
be the same character before and after. No spaces come between '\verb'
or '\verb*' and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
LITERAL-TEXT and the second occurrence of CHAR (the synopsis shows a
@@ -5592,21 +6297,25 @@ break.
The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible
space character.
- The output from this will include a character showing the spaces.
+ The output from this will include a visible space on both side of
+word 'with':
- The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
+ The command's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ...
- For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package 'url' provides
-an option that is better than the '\verb' command, since it allows line
-breaks.
+ For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package 'url' is a
+better option than the '\verb' command, since it allows line breaks.
For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
'\verb'. One is 'listings', another is 'minted'.
You cannot use '\verb' in the argument to a macro, for instance in
the argument to a '\section'. It is not a question of '\verb' being
-fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot appear there. (But
-the 'cprotect' package can help with this.)
+fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot work, as the '\verb'
+command changes the catcode regime before reading its argument, and
+restore it immediately afterward, nevertheless with a macro argument the
+content of the argument has already be converted to a token list along
+the catcode regime in effect when the macro was called. However, the
+'cprotect' package can help with this.
8.28 'verse'
============
@@ -5731,8 +6440,8 @@ internally) the same as '\\', followed by '\relax'. So each new line in
the input will also be a new line in the output. The '\restorecr'
command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
- This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. *Note
-verbatim:: instead.
+ This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use
+'verbatim' (*note verbatim::) instead.
With LaTeX's usual defaults, this
@@ -5932,8 +6641,8 @@ standard legal text.
underrepresented groups.
When you issue '\linebreak', the spaces in the line are stretched out
-so that it extends to the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note \newline::
-to have the spaces not stretched out.
+so that it extends to the right margin. *Note \\:: and *note
+\newline::, to have the spaces not stretched out.
10 Page breaking
****************
@@ -5964,7 +6673,7 @@ second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn't look as far
ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence
page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
- *Note Layout:: for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
+ *Note Layout::, for more material that is relevant to page breaking.
10.1 '\clearpage' & '\cleardoublepage'
======================================
@@ -6036,7 +6745,7 @@ requested. This
\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the
proposition that all men are created equal.
-makes a new page start after 'continent,' and the cut-off line is not
+makes a new page start after 'continent', and the cut-off line is not
right justified. In addition, '\newpage' does not vertically stretch
out the page, as '\pagebreak' does.
@@ -6098,20 +6807,20 @@ following the line in which they appear. So this
a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition
that all men are created equal.
-does not give a page break at 'continent,' but instead at 'nation,'
+does not give a page break at 'continent', but instead at 'nation',
since that is where LaTeX breaks that line. In addition, with
'\pagebreak' the vertical space on the page is stretched out where
possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. This can look
strange, and if '\flushbottom' is in effect this can cause you to get
'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active'.
-*Note \newpage:: for a command that does not have these effects.
+*Note \newpage::, for a command that does not have these effects.
11 Footnotes
************
Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
- Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+ Noël Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
love.\footnote{%
I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
@@ -6260,7 +6969,7 @@ Synopsis, one of:
command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (*note Modes::). The
optional argument NUMBER changes the number of the footnote mark.
- *Note \footnotemark:: and *note Footnotes in a table:: for usage
+ *Note \footnotemark:: and *note Footnotes in a table::, for usage
examples.
11.4 Footnotes in section headings
@@ -6394,10 +7103,12 @@ or one of these.
\renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
\renewcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
- Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of
-'\DeclareRobustCommand' in *note Class and package commands::. The
-starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain
-multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms that it not be '\long').
+ Define or redefine a command (see also the discussion of
+'\DeclareRobustCommand' in *note Class and package commands::).
+
+ The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing
+multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms, the commands are not
+'\long'). With the default form, arguments can be multiple paragraphs.
These are the parameters:
@@ -6419,7 +7130,7 @@ NARGS
OPTARGDEFAULT
Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
'\CMD' is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be
- the empty string). If this argument is not present then '\CMD'
+ the empty string). If OPTARGSDEFAULT is not present then '\CMD'
does not take an optional argument.
That is, if '\CMD' is used with square brackets, as in
@@ -6515,13 +7226,13 @@ If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect
as '\newcommand'. If a command of this name already exists then this
definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file that may
be loaded more than once, such as a style file. *Note \newcommand &
-\renewcommand:: for the description of the arguments.
+\renewcommand::, for the description of the arguments.
This example
\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College}
- From \myaffiliation.
+ >From \myaffiliation.
outputs 'From Saint Michael's College'. Unlike '\newcommand', the
repeated use of '\providecommand' does not give an error.
@@ -6554,16 +7265,15 @@ writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package
or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their
own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12.
- The pair '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' changes the default code
-and then changes it back. Use them inside a '.tex' file, in the
-preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands named with '@',
-by having them surround your definition. Don't use these inside '.sty'
-or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and '\documentclass' commands
-already arrange that the at-sign has the character code of a letter,
-catcode 11.
+ Use the pair '\makeatletter' and '\makeatother' inside a '.tex' file,
+typically in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
+named with '@', by having them surround your definition. Don't use
+these inside '.sty' or '.cls' files since the '\usepackage' and
+'\documentclass' commands already arrange that the at-sign has the
+character code of a letter, catcode 11.
For a comprehensive list of macros with an at-sign in their names see
-<http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.
+<https://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e>.
In this example the class file has a command '\thesis@universityname'
that the user wants to change. These three lines should go in the
@@ -6589,26 +7299,31 @@ are the 'table' and 'table*' environments and the '\section' and
When defining environments, following this pattern is straightforward
because '\newenvironment' and '\renewenvironment' allow the environment
-name to contain a star. For commands the situation is more complex. As
-in the synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above
-as '\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
+name to contain a star. So you just have to write
+'\newenvironment{MYENV}' or '\newenvironment{MYENV*}' and continue the
+definition as usual. For commands the situation is more complex as the
+star not being a letter cannot be part of the command name. As in the
+synopsis above, there will be a user-called command, given above as
+'\mycmd', which peeks ahead to see if it is followed by a star. For
instance, LaTeX does not really have a '\section*' command; instead, the
'\section' command peeks ahead. This command does not accept arguments
but instead expands to one of two commands that do accept arguments. In
the synopsis these two are '\mycmd@nostar' and '\mycmd@star'. They
could take the same number of arguments or a different number, or no
-arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX document a command using
-at-sign '@' must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ... \makeatother'
-block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
+arguments at all. As always, in a LaTeX document a command using an
+at-sign '@' in its name must be enclosed inside a '\makeatletter ...
+\makeatother' block (*note \makeatletter & \makeatother::).
This example of '\@ifstar' defines the command '\ciel' and a variant
-'\ciel*'. Both have one required argument. A call to '\ciel{night}'
-will return "starry night sky" while '\ciel*{blue}' will return "starry
-not blue sky".
+'\ciel*'. Both have one required argument. A call to '\ciel{blue}'
+will return "not starry blue sky" while '\ciel*{night}' will return
+"starry night sky".
- \newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
- \newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry not #1 sky}
+ \makeatletter
+ \newcommand*{\ciel@unstarred}[1]{not starry #1 sky}
+ \newcommand*{\ciel@starred}[1]{starry #1 sky}
\newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}}
+ \makeatother
In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007's
@@ -6621,15 +7336,23 @@ equivalent to entering the commands '``My name is \textsc{Bond},
\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{%
\@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}}
- There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work
-of '\@ifstar'. The 'suffix' package allows the construct
-'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED VERSION}' followed by
-'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED VERSION}'. And LaTeX3 has
-the 'xparse' package that allows this code.
+ After a command name, a star is handled similarly to an optional
+argument. (This differs from environment names in which the star is
+part of the name itself and as such could be in any position.) Thus, it
+is technically possible to put any number of spaces between the command
+and the star. Thus '\agentsecret*{Bond}' and '\agentsecret *{Bond}' are
+equivalent. However, the standard practice is not to insert any such
+spaces.
+
+ There are two alternative ways to accomplish the work of '\@ifstar'.
+(1) The 'suffix' package allows the construct
+'\newcommand\mycommand{UNSTARRED-VARIANT}' followed by
+'\WithSuffix\newcommand\mycommand*{STARRED-VARIANT}'. (2) LaTeX
+provides the 'xparse' package, which allows this code:
\NewDocumentCommand\foo{s}{\IfBooleanTF#1
- {STARRED VERSION}%
- {UNSTARRED VERSION}%
+ {STARRED-VARIANT}%
+ {UNSTARRED-VARIANT}%
}
12.5 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
@@ -7066,7 +7789,7 @@ or
Both commands cause LaTeX to ignore spaces after the end of the
command up until the first non-space character. The first is a command
-from Plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
+from plain TeX, and the second is LaTeX-specific.
The 'ignorespaces' is often used when defining commands via
'\newcommand', or '\newenvironment', or '\def'. The example below
@@ -7091,21 +7814,20 @@ The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names.
But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then
'\fullname' will reproduce that.
- \makeatletter
- \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title
- \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name
- \makeatother
+ \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\honorific{#1}} % remember title
+ \newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\honorific~#1} % put title before name
+
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
\honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here
\honorific{ Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} % extra space before title
\end{tabular}
To fix this, change to
-'\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\@honorific~#1}'.
+'\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\ignorespaces\honorific~#1}'.
The '\ignorespaces' is also often used in a '\newenvironment' at the
-end of the BEGIN clause, that is, as part of the second argument, as in
-'\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{... \ignorespaces}{...}'.
+end of the BEGIN clause, as in '\begin{newenvironment}{ENV NAME}{...
+\ignorespaces}{...}'.
To strip spaces off the end of an environment use
'\ignorespacesafterend'. An example is that this will show a much
@@ -7128,6 +7850,55 @@ make the vertical space disappear, but that is inconvenient. The
solution is to change to
'\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}'.
+12.13 xspace package
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage{xspace}
+ ...
+ \newcommand{...}{...\xspace}
+
+ The '\xspace' macro, when used at the end of a command, adds a space
+unless the command is followed by certain punctuation characters.
+
+ After a command name that uses letters (as opposed to single
+character command names using non-letters such as '\$'), TeX gobbles
+white space. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has
+'Vermont' placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
+space.
+
+ \newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
+ Our college is in \VT .
+ The \VT{} summers are nice.
+
+ But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the dummy
+curly braces or else there would be no space separating 'Vermont' from
+'summers'. (Many authors instead instead use a backslash-space '\ ' for
+this. *Note \(SPACE)::.)
+
+ The 'xspace' package provides '\xspace'. It is for writing commands
+which are designed to be used mainly in text. It inserts a space after
+that command unless what immediately follows is in a list of exceptions.
+In this example, the dummy braces are not needed.
+
+ \newcommand{\VT}{Vermont\xspace}
+ Our college is in \VT .
+ \VT summers are nice.
+
+ The default exception list contains the characters ',.'/?;:!~-)', the
+open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, and
+the commands '\footnote' or '\footnotemark'. Add to that list as with
+'\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}' and remove from that list as with
+'\xspaceremoveexception{!}'.
+
+ A comment: many experts prefer not to use '\xspace'. Putting it in a
+definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right.
+But it isn't easy to predict when to enter dummy braces because
+'\xspace' will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
+command, and so '\xspace' can make editing material harder and more
+error-prone than instead always remembering the dummy braces.
+
13 Counters
***********
@@ -7202,14 +7973,14 @@ with a backslash.
Number Name Command Symbol
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 asterisk '\ast' *
- 2 dagger '\dagger' U+2020
- 3 ddagger '\ddagger' U+2021
- 4 section-sign '\S' U+00A7
- 5 paragraph-sign '\P' U+00B6
- 6 double-vert '\parallel' U+2016
+ 2 dagger '\dagger' †
+ 3 ddagger '\ddagger' ‡
+ 4 section-sign '\S' §
+ 5 paragraph-sign '\P' ¶
+ 6 double-vert '\parallel' ‖
7 double-asterisk '\ast\ast' **
- 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' U+2020U+2020
- 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' U+2021U+2021
+ 8 double-dagger '\dagger\dagger' ††
+ 9 double-ddagger '\ddagger\ddagger' ‡‡
13.2 '\usecounter'
==================
@@ -7293,7 +8064,7 @@ line will print 'XII'.
Synopsis:
- \addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE
+ \addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
Globally increment COUNTER by the amount specified by the VALUE
argument, which may be negative.
@@ -7334,8 +8105,8 @@ it. (For the definition of "counters numbered within", *note
\newcounter::.)
This command differs from '\refstepcounter' in that this one does not
-influence references -- it does not define the current '\ref' value to
-be the result of '\thecounter' (*note \refstepcounter::).
+influence references; that is, it does not define the current '\ref'
+value to be the result of '\thecounter' (*note \refstepcounter::).
13.8 '\day' & '\month' & '\year'
================================
@@ -7364,11 +8135,11 @@ as an argument.
Lengths come in two types. A "rigid length" such as '10pt' does not
contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component. (Plain TeX calls this a
-"dimen".) A "rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") such as as
-with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm' can contain either or both of those
-components. In that rubber length, the '1cm' is the "natural length"
-while the other two, the 'plus' and 'minus' components, allow TeX to
-stretch or shrink the length to optimize placement.
+"dimen".) A "rubber length" (what plain TeX calls a "skip" or "glue")
+such as with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm' can contain either or both of
+those components. In that rubber length, the '1cm' is the "natural
+length" while the other two, the 'plus' and 'minus' components, allow
+TeX to stretch or shrink the length to optimize placement.
The illustrations below use these two commands.
@@ -7460,8 +8231,8 @@ TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
mode.
'pt'
- Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two
- decimal places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+ Point, 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units is 1point =
+ 2.845mm = .2845cm.
'pc'
Pica, 12 pt
@@ -7632,6 +8403,137 @@ If you leave the backslash out of LEN, as in
'\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...}' then you get something like 'Missing
number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox'.
+14.7 '\stretch'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \stretch{NUMBER}
+
+ Produces a rubber length with zero natural length and NUMBER times
+'\fill' units of stretchability (*note Lengths::). The NUMBER can be
+positive or negative. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+
+ It works for both vertical and horizontal spacing. In this
+horizontal example, LaTeX produces three tick marks, and the distance
+between the first and second is half again as long as the distance
+between the second and third.
+
+ \rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1.5}}%
+ \rule{0.4pt}{1ex}\hspace{\stretch{1}}%
+ \rule{0.4pt}{1ex}
+
+ In this vertical example, the 'We dedicate ...' will have three times
+as much space under it as above it.
+
+ \newenvironment{dedication}{% in document preamble
+ \clearpage\thispagestyle{empty}%
+ \vspace*{\stretch{1}} % stretchable space at top
+ \it
+ }{%
+ \vspace{\stretch{3}} % space at bot is 3x as at top
+ \clearpage
+ }
+ ...
+ \begin{dedication} % in document body
+ We dedicate this book to our wives.
+ \end{dedication}
+
+14.8 Expressions
+================
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \numexpr EXPRESSION
+ \dimexpr EXPRESSION
+ \glueexpr EXPRESSION
+ \muglue EXPRESSION
+
+ Any place where you may write an integer, or a TeX dimen, or TeX
+glue, or muglue, you can instead write an expression to compute that
+type of quantity.
+
+ An example is that '\the\dimexpr\linewidth-4pt\relax' will produce as
+output the length that is four points less than width of a line (the
+only purpose of '\the' is to show the result in the document).
+Analogously, '\romannumeral\numexpr6+3\relax' will produce 'ix', and
+'\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax' will produce '10.0pt plus
+2.0pt'.
+
+ A convenience here over doing calculations by allocating registers
+and then using '\advance', etc., is that the evaluation of expressions
+does not involve assignments and can therefore be performed in places
+where assignments are not allowed. The next example computes the width
+of the '\parbox'.
+
+ \newlength{\offset}\setlength{\offset}{2em}
+ \begin{center}
+ \parbox{\dimexpr\linewidth-\offset*3}{With malice toward none
+ with charity for all with firmness in the right as God gives us to see
+ the right let us strive on to finish the work we are in to bind up the
+ nation's wounds, to care for him who shall have borne the battle and
+ for his widow and his orphan \textasciitilde\ to do all which may
+ achieve and cherish a just and lasting peace among ourselves and with
+ all nations. ---Abraham Lincoln, Second Inaugural Address, from the
+ memorial}
+ \end{center}
+
+ The EXPRESSION consists of one or more terms of the same type
+(integer, dimension, etc.) that are added or subtracted. A term that
+is a type of number, dimension, etc., consists of a factor of that type,
+optionally multiplied or divided by factors. A factor of a type is
+either a quantity of that type or a parenthesized subexpression. The
+expression produces a result of the given type, so that '\numexpr'
+produces an integer, '\dimexpr' produces a dimension, etc.
+
+ In the quotation example above, changing to
+'\dimexpr\linewidth-3*\offset' gives the error 'Illegal unit of measure
+(pt inserted)'. This is because for '\dimexpr' and '\glueexpr', the
+input consists of a dimension or glue value followed by an optional
+multiplication factor, and not the other way around. Thus '\the\dimexpr
+1pt*10\relax' is valid and produces '10.0pt', but '\the\dimexpr
+10*1pt\relax' gives the 'Illegal unit' error.
+
+ The expressions absorb tokens and carry out appropriate mathematics
+up to a '\relax' (which will be absorbed), or up to the first non-valid
+token. Thus, '\the\numexpr2+3px' will print '5px', because LaTeX reads
+the '\numexpr2+3', which is made up of numbers, and then finds the
+letter 'p', which cannot be part of a number. It therefore terminates
+the expression and produces the '5', followed by the regular text 'px'.
+
+ This termination behavior is useful in comparisons. In
+'\ifnum\numexpr\parindent*2 < 10pt Yes\else No\fi', the less than sign
+terminates the expression and the result is 'No' (in a standard LaTeX
+article).
+
+ Expressions may use the operators '+', '-', '*' and '/' along with
+parentheses for subexpressions, '(...)'. In glue expressions the 'plus'
+and 'minus' parts do not need parentheses to be affected by a factor.
+So '\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax' results in '10pt plus 2pt'.
+
+ TeX will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when
+doing register assignment. Thus '\the\numexpr\dimexpr 1pt\relax\relax'
+will result in '65536', which is '1pt' converted to scaled points (TeX's
+internal unit) and then coerced into an integer. With a '\glueexpr'
+here, the stretch and shrink would be dropped. Going the other way, a
+'\numexpr' inside a '\dimexpr' or '\glueexpr' will need appropriate
+units, as in '\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 + 2\relax pt\relax', which produces
+'3.0pt'.
+
+ The details of the arithmetic: each factor is checked to be in the
+allowed range, numbers must be less than 2^{31} in absolute value, and
+dimensions or glue components must be less than 2^{14} points, or 'mu',
+or 'fil', etc. The arithmetic operations are performed individually,
+except for a scaling operation (a multiplication immediately followed by
+a division) which is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit
+product as intermediate value. The result of each operation is again
+checked to be in the allowed range.
+
+ Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike TeX's
+'\divide', which truncates). Thus '\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax' puts
+'10.0pt' in the document, because it rounds '3/2' to '2', while
+'\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax' produces '5.0pt'.
+
15 Making paragraphs
********************
@@ -7744,7 +8646,7 @@ outputs an empty box whose width is '\parindent'. These commands are
robust (*note \protect::).
Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line.
-*Note \par:: for the difference between this command and '\par'. To
+*Note \par::, for the difference between this command and '\par'. To
start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted
paragraph, use '\noindent'.
@@ -7782,27 +8684,32 @@ look on CTAN for the package 'indentfirst'.
Synopsis:
- \setlength{\parskip}{HORIZONTAL LEN}
- \setlength{\parinden}{VERTICAL LEN}
+ \setlength{\parindent}{HORIZONTAL LEN}
+ \setlength{\parskip}{VERTICAL LEN}
- Both are a rubber lengths (*note Lengths::). They give the
+ Both are rubber lengths (*note Lengths::). They affect the
indentation of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages
-(*note minipage::), and the vertical space between paragraphs.
+(*note minipage::), and the vertical space between paragraphs,
+respectively.
- This, put in the preamble,
+ For example, if this is put in the preamble:
\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
\setlength{\parskip}{1ex}
-arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented,
-but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase
-'x'.
+The document will have paragraphs that are not indented, but instead are
+vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase 'x'.
In standard LaTeX documents, the default value for '\parindent' in
-one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt' ,
+one-column documents is '15pt' when the default text size is '10pt',
'17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em' for '12pt'. In two-column documents it
-is '1em'. The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document
-styles is '0pt plus1pt'.
+is '1em'. (These values are set before LaTeX calls '\normalfont' so
+'em' is derived from the default font, Computer Modern. If you use a
+different font then to set '\parindent' in units matching that font, do
+'\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}'.)
+
+ The default value for '\parskip' in LaTeX's standard document styles
+is '0pt plus1pt'.
15.4 Marginal notes
===================
@@ -7838,7 +8745,8 @@ hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with '\hspace{0pt}'.
'\marginparpush'
Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt'
- documents, '5pt' else.
+ documents, '5pt' else. See also *note page layout parameters
+ marginparpush::.
'\marginparsep'
Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt'
@@ -7999,12 +8907,12 @@ like '{}_t K^2'. The empty curly braces '{}' give the subscript
something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally attaching to a
prior symbols.
- Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or
+ Using the subscript or superscript character outside of math mode or
display math mode, as in 'the expression x^2', will get you the error
'Missing $ inserted'.
A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is
-to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
+to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as
'mhchem'; see CTAN.
16.2 Math symbols
@@ -8012,8 +8920,8 @@ to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as
LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that anyone
uses. For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get
-the pi symbol U+03C0. See the 'Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List' at
-<https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/>.
+the pi symbol π. See the "Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List" package at
+<https://ctan.org/pkg/comprehensive>.
Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means
exhaustive. Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its
@@ -8023,384 +8931,369 @@ be used only in math mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used
whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
'\|'
- U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
+ ∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
'\aleph'
- U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
+ ℵ Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
'\alpha'
- U+03B1 Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
+ α Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
'\amalg'
- U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)
+ ⨿ Disjoint union (binary)
'\angle'
- U+2220 Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
+ ∠ Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
angle bracket '\langle'.
'\approx'
- U+2248 Almost equal to (relation).
+ ≈ Almost equal to (relation).
'\ast'
- U+2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
+ ∗ Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
Kleene star. Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
reserved for cross-correlation.
'\asymp'
- U+224D Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
+ ≍ Asymptotically equivalent (relation).
'\backslash'
\ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
'\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
'\beta'
- U+03B2 Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
+ β Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary).
'\bigcap'
- U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+ ⋂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
binary intersection '\cap'.
'\bigcirc'
- U+26AA Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
- composition '\circ'.
+ ⚪ Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function composition '\circ'.
'\bigcup'
- U+22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+ ⋃ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
union '\cup'.
'\bigodot'
- U+2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
+ ⨀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
'\bigoplus'
- U+2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
+ ⨁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
'\bigotimes'
- U+2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
+ ⨂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
'\bigtriangledown'
- U+25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
- (operator).
+ ▽ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down (operator).
'\bigtriangleup'
- U+25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up
- (operator).
+ △ Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up (operator).
'\bigsqcup'
- U+2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
+ ⨆ Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
'\biguplus'
- U+2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
- (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
+ ⨄ Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus (operator).
+ (Note that the name has only one p.)
'\bigvee'
- U+22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
+ ⋁ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
'\bigwedge'
- U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
+ ⋀ Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
'\bot'
- U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set,
- or a contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
+ ⊥, Up tack, bottom, least element of a partially ordered set, or a
+ contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
'\bowtie'
- U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).
+ ⋈ Natural join of two relations (relation).
'\Box'
- U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
- Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
- 'amssymb' package.
+ □ Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary). Not
+ available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
+ package.
'\bullet'
- U+2022 Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
+ • Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
'\cap'
- U+2229 Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ ∩ Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
operator '\bigcap'.
'\cdot'
- U+22C5 Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
+ ⋅ Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
'\chi'
- U+03C7 Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
+ χ Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary).
'\circ'
- U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+ ∘ Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.
'\clubsuit'
- U+2663 Club card suit (ordinary).
+ ♣ Club card suit (ordinary).
'\complement'
- U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
- '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In
- LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
- '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.
+ ∁, Set complement, used as a superscript as in '$S^\complement$'
+ (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load
+ the 'amssymb' package. Also used: '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$'
+ or '$\bar{S}$'.
'\cong'
- U+2245 Congruent (relation).
+ ≅ Congruent (relation).
'\coprod'
- U+2210 Coproduct (operator).
+ ∐ Coproduct (operator).
'\cup'
- U+222A Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ ∪ Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
operator '\bigcup'.
'\dagger'
- U+2020 Dagger relation (binary).
+ † Dagger relation (binary).
'\dashv'
- U+22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+ ⊣ Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
turnstile '\vdash'.
'\ddagger'
- U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).
+ ‡ Double dagger relation (binary).
'\Delta'
- U+0394 Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
+ Δ Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary).
'\delta'
- U+03B4 Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
+ δ Greek lowercase delta (ordinary).
'\Diamond'
- U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain
- TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
+ ◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package.
'\diamond'
- U+22C4 Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large
- diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
+ ⋄ Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large diamond '\Diamond',
+ circle bullet '\bullet'.
'\diamondsuit'
- U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).
+ ♢ Diamond card suit (ordinary).
'\div'
- U+00F7 Division sign (binary).
+ ÷ Division sign (binary).
'\doteq'
- U+2250 Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically
- equal to '\Doteq'.
+ ≐ Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically equal
+ to '\Doteq'.
'\downarrow'
- U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: '\Downarrow'
- double line down arrow.
+ ↓ Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: '\Downarrow' double
+ line down arrow.
'\Downarrow'
- U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: '\downarrow'
- single line down arrow.
+ ⇓ Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: '\downarrow' single
+ line down arrow.
'\ell'
- U+2113 Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
+ ℓ Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary).
'\emptyset'
- U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varnothing'.
+ ∅ Empty set symbol (ordinary). The variant form is '\varnothing'.
'\epsilon'
- U+03F5 Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text
+ ϵ Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text
letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter
- epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related: the set membership relation
- '\in' U+2208.
+ epsilon '\varepsilon' ε. Related: the set membership relation
+ '\in' ∈.
'\equiv'
- U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
+ ≡ Equivalence (relation).
'\eta'
- U+03B7 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ η Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\exists'
- U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).
+ ∃ Existential quantifier (ordinary).
'\flat'
- U+266D Musical flat (ordinary).
+ ♭ Musical flat (ordinary).
'\forall'
- U+2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary).
+ ∀ Universal quantifier (ordinary).
'\frown'
- U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).
+ ⌢ Downward curving arc (ordinary).
'\Gamma'
- U+0393 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Γ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\gamma'
- U+03B3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ γ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\ge'
- U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ ≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
for '\geq'.
'\geq'
- U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ ≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
for '\ge'.
'\gets'
- U+2190 Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
+ ← Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
'\gg'
- U+226B Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
- than '\ll'.
+ ≫ Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less than '\ll'.
'\hbar'
- U+210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
+ ℏ Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
'\heartsuit'
- U+2661 Heart card suit (ordinary).
+ ♡ Heart card suit (ordinary).
'\hookleftarrow'
- U+21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation).
+ ↩ Hooked left arrow (relation).
'\hookrightarrow'
- U+21AA Hooked right arrow (relation).
+ ↪ Hooked right arrow (relation).
'\iff'
- U+27F7 If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with
- a '\thickmuskip' on either side.
+ ⟷ If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with a
+ '\thickmuskip' on either side.
'\Im'
- U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
+ ℑ Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
'\imath'
Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (*note Math
accents::).
'\in'
- U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
- epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and small letter script
- epsilon '\varepsilon'.
+ ∈ Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate
+ epsilon '\epsilon'ϵ and small letter script epsilon '\varepsilon'.
'\infty'
- U+221E Infinity (ordinary).
+ ∞ Infinity (ordinary).
'\int'
- U+222B Integral (operator).
+ ∫ Integral (operator).
'\iota'
- U+03B9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ ι Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\Join'
- U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
- TeX.
+ ⨝ Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain TeX.
'\jmath'
Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (*note Math
accents::).
'\kappa'
- U+03BA Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ κ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\Lambda'
- U+039B uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Λ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\lambda'
- U+03BB Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ λ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\land'
- U+2227 Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for '\wedge'. See
- also logical or '\lor'.
+ ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\wedge'. See also
+ logical or '\lor'.
'\langle'
- U+27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+ ⟨ Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
less-than '<'. Matches '\rangle'.
'\lbrace'
- U+007B Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'.
- Matches '\rbrace'.
+ { Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'. Matches '\rbrace'.
'\lbrack'
- U+005B Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['.
- Matches '\rbrack'.
+ [ Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['. Matches '\rbrack'.
'\lceil'
- U+2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the
- bottom shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
+ ⌈ Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the bottom
+ shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
'\le'
- U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
- for '\leq'.
+ ≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for '\leq'.
'\leadsto'
- U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). Not available in plain
- TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. To get this
- symbol outside of math mode you can put
+ ⇝ Squiggly right arrow (relation). To get this symbol outside of
+ math mode you can put
'\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
then use '\Leadsto' instead.
'\Leftarrow'
- U+21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+ ⇐ Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.
'\leftarrow'
- U+2190 Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'.
- Similar: double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
+ ← Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'. Similar:
+ double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
'\leftharpoondown'
- U+21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
+ ↽ Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
'\leftharpoonup'
- U+21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
+ ↼ Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
'\Leftrightarrow'
- U+21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+ ⇔ Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.
'\leftrightarrow'
- U+2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
- double-line double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
+ ↔ Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: double-line
+ double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
'\leq'
- U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
- for '\le'.
+ ≤ Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym for '\le'.
'\lfloor'
- U+230A Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: '\floor'.
+ ⌊ Left floor bracket (opening). Matches: '\floor'.
'\lhd'
- U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). Not
- available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
- package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb'
- and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ ◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). For the
+ normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
spacing).
'\ll'
- U+226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
- than '\gg'.
+ ≪ Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater than '\gg'.
'\lnot'
- U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
+ ¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
'\longleftarrow'
- U+27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ ⟵ Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.
'\longleftrightarrow'
- U+27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
- long double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
+ ⟷ Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
'\longmapsto'
- U+27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ ⟼ Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
(relation). Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.
'\longrightarrow'
- U+27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ ⟶ Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.
'\lor'
- U+2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge '\wedge'.
+ ∨ Logical or (binary). Synonym: '\vee'. See also
+ logical and '\land'.
'\mapsto'
- U+21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
- (relation). Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
+ ↦ Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar (relation).
+ Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
'\mho'
- U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
- Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
- 'amssymb' package.
+ ℧ Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
'\mid'
- U+2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
- '\mid' is for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
+ ∣ Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of '\mid' is
+ for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
@@ -8409,471 +9302,444 @@ whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.
'\models'
- U+22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+ ⊨ Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
(relation). Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.
'\mp'
- U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).
+ ∓ Minus or plus (relation).
'\mu'
- U+03BC Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ μ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\nabla'
- U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+ ∇ Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
'\natural'
- U+266E Musical natural notation (ordinary).
+ ♮ Musical natural notation (ordinary).
'\ne'
- U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
+ ≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
'\nearrow'
- U+2197 North-east arrow (relation).
+ ↗ North-east arrow (relation).
'\neg'
- U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
+ ¬ Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
instead used for negation: '\sim'.
'\neq'
- U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
+ ≠ Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
'\ni'
- U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ ∋ Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
Synonym: '\owns'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
'\not'
- U+0020 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following
- operator (relation).
+ Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following operator
+ (relation).
Many negated operators are available that don't require '\not',
particularly with the 'amssymb' package. For example, '\notin' is
typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
'\notin'
- U+2209 Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+ ∉ Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
of '\nsubseteq'.
'\nu'
- U+03BD Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ ν Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\nwarrow'
- U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).
+ ↖ North-west arrow (relation).
'\odot'
- U+2299 Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ ⊙ Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
operator '\bigodot'.
'\oint'
- U+222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
- (operator).
+ ∮ Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator).
'\Omega'
- U+03A9 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Ω uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\omega'
- U+03C9 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ ω Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\ominus'
- U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
+ ⊖ Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
'\oplus'
- U+2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ ⊕ Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
operator '\bigoplus'.
'\oslash'
- U+2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
+ ⊘ Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
'\otimes'
- U+2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+ ⊗ Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.
'\owns'
- U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ ∋ Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
Synonym: '\ni'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
'\parallel'
- U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
+ ∥ Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
'\partial'
- U+2202 Partial differential (ordinary).
+ ∂ Partial differential (ordinary).
'\perp'
- U+27C2 Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same
- glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
- ordinary.
+ ⟂ Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same glyph
+ but the spacing is different because it is in the class ordinary.
+
+'\Phi'
+ Φ Uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\phi'
- U+03D5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varphi' U+03C6.
+ ϕ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varphi' φ.
'\Pi'
- U+03A0 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Π uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\pi'
- U+03C0 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varpi' U+03D6.
+ π Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varpi' ϖ.
'\pm'
- U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).
+ ± Plus or minus (binary).
'\prec'
- U+227A Precedes (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
+ ≺ Precedes (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
'\preceq'
- U+2AAF Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ ⪯ Precedes or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
equals '\leq'.
'\prime'
- U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
- used as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$'
- produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
- '$f'''$' produces the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
+ ′ Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically used
+ as a superscript: '$f^\prime$'; '$f^\prime$' and '$f'$' produce the
+ same result. An advantage of the second is that '$f'''$' produces
+ the desired symbol, that is, the same result as
'$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses rather less typing. You can
only use '\prime' in math mode. Using the right single quote '''
in text mode produces a different character (apostrophe).
'\prod'
- U+220F Product (operator).
+ ∏ Product (operator).
'\propto'
- U+221D Is proportional to (relation)
+ ∝ Is proportional to (relation)
'\Psi'
- U+03A8 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Ψ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\psi'
- U+03C8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ ψ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\rangle'
- U+27E9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
- greater than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
+ ⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater
+ than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
'\rbrace'
- U+007D Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'.
- Matches '\lbrace'.
+ } Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'. Matches '\lbrace'.
'\rbrack'
- U+005D Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
+ ] Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
Matches '\lbrack'.
'\rceil'
- U+2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
+ ⌉ Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
'\Re'
- U+211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary).
- Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access
- this, load the 'amsfonts' package.
+ ℜ Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary). Related:
+ double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access this,
+ load the 'amsfonts' package.
'\restriction'
- U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
+ ↾, Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym:
'\upharpoonright'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
to load the 'amssymb' package.
'\revemptyset'
- U+29B0 Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related:
- '\varnothing'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
- load the 'stix' package.
+ ⦰, Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: '\varnothing'.
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'stix'
+ package.
'\rfloor'
- U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
- off (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
+ ⌋ Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut off
+ (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
'\rhd'
- U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). Not
- available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb'
- package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead load
- 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so
- gives better spacing).
+ ◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). For the
+ normal subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
'\rho'
- U+03C1 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varrho' U+03F1.
+ ρ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varrho' ϱ.
'\Rightarrow'
- U+21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation).
- Similar: right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
+ ⇒ Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar:
+ right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
'\rightarrow'
- U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
- Synonym: '\to'. Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
+ → Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: '\to'.
+ Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
'\rightharpoondown'
- U+21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
+ ⇁ Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
'\rightharpoonup'
- U+21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
+ ⇀ Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
'\rightleftharpoons'
- U+21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
+ ⇌ Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
'\searrow'
- U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
+ ↘ Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
'\setminus'
- U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \
+ ⧵ Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, like \
(binary). Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also
'\textbackslash' outside of math mode.
'\sharp'
- U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).
+ ♯ Musical sharp (ordinary).
'\Sigma'
- U+03A3 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Σ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\sigma'
- U+03C3 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\varsigma' U+03C2.
+ σ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varsigma' ς.
'\sim'
- U+223C Similar, in a relation (relation).
+ ∼ Similar, in a relation (relation).
'\simeq'
- U+2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
+ ≃ Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
'\smallint'
- U+222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
- display (operator).
+ ∫ Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a display
+ (operator).
'\smile'
- U+2323 Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
+ ⌣ Upward curving arc, smile (ordinary).
'\spadesuit'
- U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).
+ ♠ Spade card suit (ordinary).
'\sqcap'
- U+2293 Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+ ⊓ Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
intersection 'cap'.
'\sqcup'
- U+2294 Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'.
- Related: variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
+ ⊔ Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'. Related:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
'\sqsubset'
- U+228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
+ ⊏, Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
'amssymb' package.
'\sqsubseteq'
- U+2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
- equal to '\subseteq'.
+ ⊑ Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or equal
+ to '\subseteq'.
'\sqsupset'
- U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
- superset '\supset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need
- to load the 'amssymb' package.
+ ⊐, Square superset symbol (relation). Similar: superset '\supset'.
+ Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\sqsupseteq'
- U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset
- or equal '\supseteq'.
+ ⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or
+ equal '\supseteq'.
'\star'
- U+22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
- operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
- Similar: the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are
- six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
- as with the Kleene star.
+ ⋆ Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation
+ but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). Similar:
+ the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are six-pointed, and
+ more often appear as a superscript or subscript, as with the Kleene
+ star.
'\subset'
- U+2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
+ ⊂ Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
'\subseteq'
- U+2286 Subset or equal to (relation).
+ ⊆ Subset or equal to (relation).
'\succ'
- U+227B Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
- than '>'.
+ ≻ Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less than '>'.
'\succeq'
- U+2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or
- equal to '\leq'.
+ ⪰ Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or equal
+ to '\leq'.
'\sum'
- U+2211 Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
- sigma '\Sigma'.
+ ∑ Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital sigma '\Sigma'.
'\supset'
- U+2283 Superset (relation).
+ ⊃ Superset (relation).
'\supseteq'
- U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).
+ ⊇ Superset or equal to (relation).
'\surd'
- U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
+ √ Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{...}'
typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
to cover the argument.
'\swarrow'
- U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
+ ↙ Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
'\tau'
- U+03C4 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ τ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\theta'
- U+03B8 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
- '\vartheta' U+03D1.
+ θ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\vartheta' ϑ.
'\times'
- U+00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
- also '\cdot'.
+ × Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See also '\cdot'.
'\to'
- U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ → Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
'\top'
- U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary).
- See also '\bot'.
+ ⊤ Top, greatest element of a partially ordered set (ordinary). See
+ also '\bot'.
'\triangle'
- U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).
+ △ Triangle (ordinary).
'\triangleleft'
- U+25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary).
- Similar: '\lhd'. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
- 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
- gives better spacing).
+ ◁ Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary). Similar: '\lhd'.
+ For the normal subgroup symbol you should load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
'\triangleright'
- U+25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
+ ▷ Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
spacing).
'\unlhd'
- U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
- triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
- In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
- subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
- is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+ ⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, triangle,
+ with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup symbol load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
'\unrhd'
- U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
- triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain TeX.
- In LaTeX you need to load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
- subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
- is a relation and so gives better spacing).
+ ⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is,
+ triangle, with a line under (binary). For the normal subgroup
+ symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which is a
+ relation and so gives better spacing).
'\Uparrow'
- U+21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
+ ⇑ Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.
'\uparrow'
- U+2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation).
- Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
+ ↑ Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation). Similar:
+ double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
'\Updownarrow'
- U+21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ ⇕ Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
arrow '\updownarrow'.
'\updownarrow'
- U+2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ ↕ Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
arrow '\Updownarrow'.
'\upharpoonright'
- U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
+ ↾, Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you
need to load the 'amssymb' package.
'\uplus'
- U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
- middle (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
+ ⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the middle
+ (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
operator '\biguplus'.
'\Upsilon'
- U+03A5 uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Υ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\upsilon'
- U+03C5 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ υ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\varepsilon'
- U+03B5 Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely
- used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
- '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
+ ε Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used
+ in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form
+ '\epsilon' ϵ. Related: set membership '\in'.
'\vanothing'
- U+2205 Empty set symbol. Similar: '\emptyset'. Related:
+ ∅, Empty set symbol. Similar: '\emptyset'. Related:
'\revemptyset'. Not available in plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to
load the 'amssymb' package.
'\varphi'
- U+03C6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
+ φ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\phi' ϕ.
'\varpi'
- U+03D6 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.
+ ϖ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\pi' π.
'\varrho'
- U+03F1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.
+ ϱ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\rho' ρ.
'\varsigma'
- U+03C2 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.
+ ς Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\sigma' σ.
'\vartheta'
- U+03D1 Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
- non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.
+ ϑ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\theta' θ.
'\vdash'
- U+22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation).
- Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
+ ⊢ Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation). Similar:
+ turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
'\vee'
- U+2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
+ ∨ Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
and '\wedge'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.
'\Vert'
- U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
- bar '\vert'.
-
- For a norm symbol, you can use the 'mathtools' package and put in
- your preamble '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}'. This
- gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars that
- are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
- write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
- the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
- with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
- argument but instead are the default height, and '\norm[SIZE
- COMMAND]{M^\perp}' also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
- the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
+ ‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). *Note Delimiters::, for how to
+ use the 'mathtools' package to create flexibly-sized norm symbols.
'\vert'
- U+007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
- vertical bar '\Vert'. For such that, as in the definition of a
- set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.
-
- For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and in your
- preamble put '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}'. This
- gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars that
- are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
- write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
- of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
- with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
- the argument but instead are the default height, and '\abs[SIZE
- COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}' also gives bars that do not grow but are
- set to the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
+ | Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For "such that", as in the
+ definition of a set, use '\mid' because it is a relation. *Note
+ Delimiters::, for how to use the 'mathtools' package to create
+ flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols.
'\wedge'
- U+2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical
- or '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
+ ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical or
+ '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
'\wp'
- U+2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary).
+ ℘ Weierstrass p (ordinary).
'\wr'
- U+2240 Wreath product (binary).
+ ≀ Wreath product (binary).
'\Xi'
- U+039E uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ Ξ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\xi'
- U+03BE Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ ξ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
'\zeta'
- U+03B6 Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
+ ζ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
The following symbols are most often used in plain text but LaTeX
provides versions to use in mathematical text.
@@ -8882,18 +9748,99 @@ provides versions to use in mathematical text.
Dollar sign in math mode: $.
'\mathparagraph'
- Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, U+00B6.
+ Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, ¶.
'\mathsection'
- Section sign in math mode U+00A7.
+ Section sign in math mode §.
'\mathsterling'
- Sterling sign in math mode: #.
+ Sterling sign in math mode: £.
'\mathunderscore'
Underscore in math mode: _.
-16.2.1 Blackboard bold
+16.2.1 Arrows
+-------------
+
+These are the arrows that come with standard LaTeX. The 'latexsym' and
+'amsfonts' packages contain many more.
+
+Symbol Command
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+⇓ '\Downarrow'
+↓ '\downarrow'
+↩ '\hookleftarrow'
+↪ '\hookrightarrow'
+← '\leftarrow'
+⇐ '\Leftarrow'
+⇔ '\Leftrightarrow'
+↔ '\leftrightarrow'
+⟵ '\longleftarrow'
+⟸ '\Longleftarrow'
+⟷ '\longleftrightarrow'
+⟺ '\Longleftrightarrow'
+⟼ '\longmapsto'
+⟹ '\Longrightarrow'
+⟶ '\longrightarrow'
+↦ '\mapsto'
+↗ '\nearrow'
+↖ '\nwarrow'
+⇒ '\Rightarrow'
+→ '\rightarrow', or '\to'
+↘ '\searrow'
+↙ '\swarrow'
+↑ '\uparrow'
+⇑ '\Uparrow'
+↕ '\updownarrow'
+⇕ '\Updownarrow'
+
+ An example of the difference between '\to' and '\mapsto' is: '\(
+f\colon D\to C \) given by \( n\mapsto n^2 \)'.
+
+ For commutative diagrams there are a number of packages, including
+'tikz-cd' and 'amscd'.
+
+16.2.2 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
+----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+
+ \boldmath \( MATH \)
+
+or
+
+ \unboldmath \( MATH \)
+
+ Declarations to change the letters and symbols in MATH to be in a
+bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular (non-bold)
+default. They must be used when not in math mode or display math mode
+(*note Modes::). Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ In this example each '\boldmath' command takes place inside an
+'\mbox',
+
+ we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+
+which means '\boldmath' is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
+explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set 'v' and 'u'.
+
+ If you use either command inside math mode, as with 'Trouble: \(
+\boldmath x \)', then you get something like 'LaTeX Font Warning:
+Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11' and 'LaTeX Font
+Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line 11'.
+
+ There are many issues with '\boldmath'. New documents should use the
+'bm' package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete description
+is outside the scope of this document (see the full documentation on
+CTAN) but even this small example
+
+ \usepackage{bm} % in preamble
+ ...
+ we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+
+shows that it is an improvement over '\boldmath'.
+
+16.2.3 Blackboard bold
----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -8910,7 +9857,7 @@ integers, etc.
\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \)
-the '\mathbb{N}' gives blackboard bold symbol U+2115 representing the
+the '\mathbb{N}' gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ, representing the
natural numbers.
If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an
@@ -8919,7 +9866,7 @@ error but you get strange results, including unexpected characters.
There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the
capital letters; look on CTAN.
-16.2.2 Calligraphic
+16.2.4 Calligraphic
-------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -8933,51 +9880,253 @@ Synopsis:
Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \).
If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not
-get an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance,
-'\mathcal{g}' outputs a close curly brace symbol, while '\mathcal{+}'
-outputs a plus sign.
+get an error but you also do not get math calligraphic output. For
+instance, '\mathcal{g}' outputs a close curly brace symbol.
-16.2.3 '\boldmath' & '\unboldmath'
-----------------------------------
+16.2.5 Delimiters
+-----------------
-Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode):
+Delimiters are parentheses, braces, or other characters used to mark the
+start and end of subformulas. This formula has three sets of
+parentheses delimiting the three subformulas.
+
+ (z-z_0)^2 = (x-x_0)^2 + (y-y_0)^2
+
+The delimiters do not need to match, so you can enter '\( [0,1) \)'.
+
+ Here are the common delimiters:
+
+DelimiterCommand Name
+------------------------------------------------------
+( '(' Left parenthesis
+) ')' Right parenthesis
+\} '{' or Left brace
+ '\lbrace'
+\{ '}' or Right brace
+ '\rbrace'
+[ '[' or Left bracket
+ '\lbrack'
+] ']' or Right bracket
+ '\rbrack'
+⌊ '\lfloor' Left floor bracket
+⌋ '\rfloor' Right floor bracket
+⌈ '\lceil' Left ceiling bracket
+⌉ '\rceil' Right ceiling bracket
+⟨ '\langle' Left angle bracket
+⟩ '\rangle' Right angle bracket
+/ '/' Slash, or forward slash
+\ '\backslash' Reverse slash, or backslash
+| '|' or Vertical bar
+ '\vert'
+‖ '\|' or Double vertical bar
+ '\Vert'
+
+ The 'mathtools' package allows you to create commands for paired
+delimiters. For instance, if you put
+'\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' in your preamble then you
+get two commands for single-line vertical bars (they only work in math
+mode). The starred version, such as '\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}', has the
+height of the vertical bars match the height of the argument. The
+unstarred version, such as '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}', has the bars fixed at a
+default height. This version accepts an optional argument, as in
+'\abs[SIZE COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}', where the height of the bars is
+given in SIZE COMMAND, such as '\Bigg'. Using '\lVert' and '\rVert' as
+the symbols will give you a norm symbol with the same behavior.
+
+16.2.5.1 '\left' & '\right'
+...........................
- \boldmath \( MATH \)
+Synopsis:
-or
+ \left DELIMITER1 ... \right DELIMITER2
- \unboldmath \( MATH \)
+ Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. LaTeX makes
+the delimiters tall enough to just cover the size of the formula that
+they enclose.
- Declarations to change the letters and symbols in MATH to be in a
-bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular (non-bold)
-default. They must be used when not in math mode or display math mode
-(*note Modes::). Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
+ This makes a unit vector surrounded by parentheses tall enough to
+cover the entries.
- In this example each '\boldmath' command takes place inside an
-'\mbox',
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left(\begin{array}{c}
+ 1 \\
+ 0 \\
+ \end{array}\right)
+ \end{equation}
- we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$
+ *Note Delimiters::, for a list of the common delimiters.
-which means '\boldmath' is only called in a text mode, here LR mode, and
-explains why LaTeX must switch to math mode to set 'v' and 'u'.
+ Every '\left' must have a matching '\right'. In the above example,
+leaving out the '\left(' gets the error message 'Extra \right'. Leaving
+out the '\right)' gets 'You can't use `\eqno' in math mode'.
- If you use either command inside math mode, as with 'Trouble: \(
-\boldmath x \)', then you get something like 'LaTeX Font Warning:
-Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11' and 'LaTeX Font
-Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line 11'.
+ However, DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not match. A common case is
+that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a period, '.', as a
+null delimiter.
- There are many issues with '\boldmath'. New documents should use the
-'bm' package provided by the LaTeX Project team. A complete description
-is outside the scope of this document (see the full documentation on
-CTAN) but even this small example
+ \begin{equation}
+ f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
+ 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
+ f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else}
+ \end{array}\right.
+ \end{equation}
- \usepackage{bm} % in preamble
- ...
- we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$
+Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
+backslash, '\{'. (The packages 'amsmath' and 'mathtools' allow you to
+get the above construct through in a 'cases' environment.)
-shows that it is an improvement over '\boldmath'.
+ The '\left ... \right' pair make a group. One consequence is that
+the formula enclosed in the '\left ... \right' pair cannot have line
+breaks in the output. This includes both manual line breaks and
+LaTeX-generated automatic ones. In this example, LaTeX breaks the
+equation to make the formula fit the margins.
+
+ Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
+ \( (a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z) \)
-16.2.4 Dots, horizontal or vertical
+But with '\left' and '\right'
+
+ Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
+ \( \left(a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z\right) \)
+
+LaTeX won't break the line, causing the formula to extend into the
+margin.
+
+ Because '\left ... \right' make a group, all the usual grouping rules
+hold. Here, the value of '\testlength' set inside the equation will be
+forgotten, and the output is '1.2pt'.
+
+ \newlength{\testlength} \setlength{\testlength}{1.2pt}
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left( a+b=c \setlength{\testlength}{3.4pt} \right)
+ \the\testlength
+ \end{equation}
+
+ The '\left ... \right' pair affect the horizontal spacing of the
+enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in '\( \sin(x) =
+\sin\left(x\right) \)' the one after the equals sign has more space
+around the 'x'. That's because '\left( ... \right)' inserts an inner
+node while '( ... )' inserts an opening node. The second way that the
+pair affect the horizontal spacing is that because they form a group,
+the enclosed subformula will be typeset at its natural width, with no
+stretching or shrinking to make the line fit better.
+
+ TeX scales the delimiters according to the height and depth of the
+contained formula. Here LaTeX grows the brackets to extend the full
+height of the integral.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left[ \int_{x=r_0}^{\infty} -G\frac{Mm}{r^2}\, dr \right]
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Manual sizing is often better. For instance, although below the rule
+has no depth, TeX will create delimiters that extend far below the rule.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left( \rule{1pt}{1cm} \right)
+ \end{equation}
+
+TeX can choose delimiters that are too small, as in '\( \left| |x|+|y|
+\right| \)'. It can also choose delimiters that are too large, as here.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \left( \sum_{0\leq i<n} i^k \right)
+ \end{equation}
+
+A third awkward case is when a long displayed formula is on more than
+one line and you must match the sizes of the opening and closing
+delimiter; you can't use '\left' on the first line and '\right' on the
+last because they must be paired.
+
+ To size the delimiters manually, see *note \bigl & \bigr etc.::.
+
+16.2.5.2 '\bigl', '\bigr', etc.
+...............................
+
+Synopsis, one of:
+
+ \biglDELIMITER1 ... \bigrDELIMITER2
+ \BiglDELIMITER1 ... \bigrDELIMITER2
+ \bigglDELIMITER1 ... \biggrDELIMITER2
+ \BigglDELIMITER1 ... \BiggrDELIMITER2
+
+(as with '\bigl[...\bigr]'; strictly speaking they need not be paired,
+see below), or one of:
+
+ \bigmDELIMITER
+ \BigmDELIMITER
+ \biggmDELIMITER
+ \BiggmDELIMITER
+
+(as with '\bigm|'), or one of:
+
+ \bigDELIMITER
+ \BigDELIMITER
+ \biggDELIMITER
+ \BiggDELIMITER
+
+(as with '\big[').
+
+ Produce manually-sized delimiters. For delimiters that are
+automatically sized see *note \left & \right::).
+
+ This produces slightly larger outer vertical bars.
+
+ \bigl| |x|+|y| \bigr|
+
+ The commands above are listed in order of increasing size. You can
+use the smallest size such as '\bigl...\bigr' in a paragraph without
+causing LaTeX to spread the lines apart. The larger sizes are meant for
+displayed equations.
+
+ *Note Delimiters::, for a list of the common delimiters. In the
+family of commands with 'l' and 'r', DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not
+be the same.
+
+ The 'l' and 'r' commands produce open and close delimiters that
+insert no horizontal space between a preceding atom and the delimiter,
+while the commands without 'l' and 'r' insert some space (because each
+delimiter is set as an ordinary variable). Compare these two.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l}
+ \(\displaystyle \sin\biggl(\frac{1}{2}\biggr) \) \\ % good
+ \(\displaystyle \sin\bigg(\frac{1}{2}\bigg) \) \\ % bad
+ \end{tabular}
+
+The traditional typographic treatment is on the first line. On the
+second line the output will have some extra space between the '\sin' and
+the open parenthesis.
+
+ Commands without 'l' or 'r' do give correct spacing in some
+circumstances, as with this large vertical line
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \int_{x=a}^b x^2\,dx = \frac{1}{3} x^3 \Big|_{x=a}^b
+ \end{equation}
+
+(many authors would replace '\frac' with the '\tfrac' command from the
+'amsmath' package), and as with this larger slash.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \lim_{n\to\infty}\pi(n) \big/ (n/\log n) = 1
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Unlike the '\left...\right' pair (*note \left & \right::), the
+commands here with 'l' and 'r' do not make a group. Strictly speaking
+they need not be matched so you can write something like this.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \Biggl[ \pi/6 ]
+ \end{equation}
+
+ The commands with 'm' are for relations, which are in the middle of
+formulas, as here.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \biggl\{ a\in B \biggm| a=\sum_{0\leq i<n}3i^2+4 \biggr\}
+ \end{equation}
+
+16.2.6 Dots, horizontal or vertical
-----------------------------------
Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern
@@ -8993,15 +10142,14 @@ continues.
'\cdots'
Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line,
- as in U+22EF. Used as: '\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)'.
+ as in ⋯. Used as: '\( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} \)'.
'\ddots'
- Diagonal ellipsis, U+22F1. See the above array example for a
- usage.
+ Diagonal ellipsis, ⋱. See the above array example for a usage.
'\ldots'
- Ellipsis on the baseline, U+2026. Used as: '\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1}
- \)'. Another example is the above array example. A synonym is
+ Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: '\( x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \)'.
+ Another example is the above array example. A synonym is
'\mathellipsis'. A synonym from the 'amsmath' package is '\hdots'.
You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in
@@ -9009,7 +10157,7 @@ continues.
or LR mode a synonym for '\ldots' is '\dots'.)
'\vdots'
- Vertical ellipsis, U+22EE. See the above array example for a usage.
+ Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a usage.
The 'amsmath' package has the command '\dots' to semantically mark up
ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs for the
@@ -9032,6 +10180,49 @@ for a comma following, '\dotsb' if you need the ellipses that fits when
the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, '\dotsi'
for dots with integrals, or '\dotso' for others.
+16.2.7 Greek letters
+--------------------
+
+The upper case versions of these Greek letters are only shown when they
+differ from Roman upper case letters.
+
+Symbol Command Name
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+α '\alpha' Alpha
+β '\beta' Beta
+γ, Γ '\gamma', '\Gamma' Gamma
+δ, Δ '\delta', '\Delta' Delta
+ε, ϵ '\varepsilon', Epsilon
+ '\epsilon'
+ζ '\zeta' Zeta
+η '\eta' Eta
+θ, ϑ '\theta', Theta
+ '\vartheta'
+ι '\iota' Iota
+κ '\kappa' Kappa
+λ, Λ '\lambda', '\Lambda' Lambda
+μ '\mu' Mu
+ν '\nu' Nu
+ξ, Ξ '\xi', '\Xi' Xi
+π, Π '\pi', '\Pi' Pi
+ρ, ϱ '\rho', '\varrho' Rho
+σ, Σ '\sigma', '\Sigma' Sigma
+τ '\tau' Tau
+ϕ, φ, '\phi', '\varphi', Phi
+Φ '\Phi'
+χ '\chi' chi
+ψ, Ψ '\psi', '\Psi' Psi
+ω, Ω '\omega', '\Omega' Omega
+
+ For omicron, if you are using LaTeX's default Computer Modern font
+then enter omicron just as 'o' or 'O'. If you like having the name or
+if your font shows a difference then you can use something like
+'\newcommand\omicron{o}'. The package 'unicode-math' has '\upomicron'
+for upright omicron and '\mitomicron' for math italic.
+
+ While the set membership relation symbol ∈ generated by '\in' is
+related to epsilon, it is never used for a variable.
+
16.3 Math functions
===================
@@ -9165,7 +10356,7 @@ Accents::).
Math breve accent
'\check'
- Math ha'c<ek (check) accent
+ Math háček (check) accent
'\ddot'
Math dieresis accent
@@ -9248,9 +10439,9 @@ When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter 'y=m x' then LaTeX
ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.
- But LaTeX's rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an
+ But LaTeX's rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an
integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the 'f(x)'
-and the 'dx', here done with the '\,' command.
+and the 'dx', here done with the '\,' command:
\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx
@@ -9261,13 +10452,25 @@ math symbols family (*note Units of length::). Thus, a '\thickspace' is
something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
'\;'
- Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. Math mode
- only.
+ Synonym: '\thickspace'. Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. With
+ 'amsmath', or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in
+ text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+
+'\negthickspace'
+ Normally '-5.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With 'amsmath', or as of
+ the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text mode as well as
+ math mode; before that, in math mode only.
'\:'
'\>'
Synonym: '\medspace'. Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'.
- Math mode only.
+ With 'amsmath', or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used
+ in text mode as well as math mode; before that, in math mode only.
+
+'\negmedspace'
+ Normally '-4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. With 'amsmath', or as of
+ the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text mode as well as
+ math mode; before that, in math mode only.
'\,'
Synonym: '\thinspace'. Normally '3mu', which is 1/6em. Can be
@@ -9284,9 +10487,11 @@ something like 5/18 times the width of a 'M'.
\end{equation}
'\!'
- A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. The '\!' command is math
- mode only but the '\negthinspace' command is available for text
- mode (*note \thinspace & \negthinspace::).
+ A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. With 'amsmath', or as of
+ the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release, can be used in text mode as well as
+ math mode; before that, The '\!' command is math mode only but the
+ '\negthinspace' command has always worked in text mode (*note
+ \thinspace & \negthinspace::).
'\quad'
This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
@@ -9375,21 +10580,31 @@ Synopsis:
The '\phantom' command creates a box with the same height, depth, and
width as SUBFORMULA, but empty. That is, this command causes LaTeX to
-typeset the box but not its ink. The '\vphantom' variant also produces
-an invisible box with the same height and depth as SUBFORMULA, but it
-has width zero. And '\hphantom' makes a box with the same width as
-SUBFORMULA but with height and depth zero.
+typeset the space but not fill it with the material. Here LaTeX will
+put a box of the right size for the quotation, but empty.
- Without the '\vphantom' in this example, the top bars of the two
-square roots would be at different heights.
+ \fbox{\phantom{Conservatism is the fear-filled worship of dead radicals.
+ --- Mark Twain}}
- \( \sqrt{\vphantom{a^3}a}\cdot\sqrt{a^3} \)
+ The '\vphantom' variant produces an invisible box with the same
+vertical size as SUBFORMULA, the same height and depth, but having zero
+width. And '\hphantom' makes a box with the same width as SUBFORMULA
+but with zero height and depth.
- The '\vphantom{a^3}' causes the first '\sqrt' to have inside it a box
-of the same height as the second '\sqrt', so LaTeX makes the bars align.
+ In this example, the tower of exponents in the second summand
+expression is so tall that TeX places this expression further down than
+its default. Without adjustment, the two summand expressions would be
+at different levels. The '\vphantom' in the first expression tells TeX
+to leave as much vertical room as it does for the tower, so the two
+expressions come out at the same level.
- These commands often are combined with '\smash'. *Note \smash:: for
-another example of the use of '\vphantom'.
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \sum_{j\in\{0,\ldots\, 10\}\vphantom{3^{3^{3^j}}}}
+ \sum_{i\in\{0,\ldots\, 3^{3^{3^j}}\}} i\cdot j
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+ These commands are often used in conjunction with '\smash'. *Note
+\smash::, which includes another example of '\vphantom'.
The three phantom commands appear often but note that LaTeX provides
a suite of other commands to work with box sizes that may be more
@@ -9409,6 +10624,28 @@ contexts. However, they don't cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
with '\leavevmode'.
+16.6.3 '\mathstrut'
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \mathstrut
+
+ The analogue of '\strut' for mathematics. *Note \strut::.
+
+ The input '$\sqrt{x} + \sqrt{x^i}$' gives output where the second
+radical is taller than the first. To add extra vertical space without
+any horizontal space, so that the two have the same height, use
+'$\sqrt{x\mathstrut} + \sqrt{x^i\mathstrut}$'.
+
+ The '\mathstrut' command adds the vertical height of an open
+parenthesis, '(', but no horizontal space. It is defined as
+'\vphantom{(}', so see *note \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom:: for
+more. An advantage over '\strut' is that '\mathstrut' adds no depth,
+which is often the right thing for formulas. Using the height of an
+open parenthesis is just a convention; for complete control over the
+amount of space, use '\rule' with a width of zero. *Note \rule::.
+
16.7 Math miscellany
====================
@@ -9443,7 +10680,7 @@ Synopsis:
\*
A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a
-break then LaTeX puts a '\times' symbol, U+00D7, before that break.
+break then LaTeX puts a '\times' symbol, ×, before that break.
In '\( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \)', if there is no line break then
LaTeX outputs it as though it were '\( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \)'. If a line
@@ -9463,42 +10700,7 @@ Synopsis:
comes out small; see the discussion of '\displaystyle' (*note Math
formulas::).
-16.7.4 '\left' & '\right'
--------------------------
-
-Synopsis:
-
- \left DELIMITER1 ... \right DELIMITER2
-
- Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The
-delimiters are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a
-unit vector surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses.
-
- \begin{equation}
- \left(\begin{array}{c}
- 1 \\
- 0 \\
- \end{array}\right)
-
- Every '\left' must have a matching '\right'. Leaving out the
-'\left(' in the above gets 'Extra \right'. Leaving off the '\right)'
-gets 'You can't use `\eqno' in math mode'.
-
- However, the two delimiters DELIMITER1 and DELIMITER2 need not match.
-A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as below. Use a
-period, '.', as a null delimiter.
-
- \begin{equation}
- f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll}
- 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\
- f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else}
- \end{array}\right.
- \end{equation}
-
-Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a
-backslash, '\{'.
-
-16.7.5 '\sqrt'
+16.7.4 '\sqrt'
--------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -9514,7 +10716,7 @@ steeper, until for a large enough 'arg', it is vertical).
LaTeX has a separate '\surd' character (*note Math symbols::).
-16.7.6 '\stackrel'
+16.7.5 '\stackrel'
------------------
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -9619,7 +10821,7 @@ Synopsis:
Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a
separate page, except in the 'article' class where it is at the top of
-the first page. (*Note Document class options:: for information about
+the first page. (*Note Document class options::, for information about
the 'titlepage' document class option.)
This example shows '\maketitle' appearing in its usual place,
@@ -9881,7 +11083,7 @@ points (*note Lengths/em::).
\qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png}
\end{center}
-*Note Spacing in math mode:: for '\quad' and '\qquad'. These are
+*Note Spacing in math mode::, for '\quad' and '\qquad'. These are
lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice in
many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with
'\hspace'.
@@ -10113,7 +11315,7 @@ The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more
space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring '\frenchspacing' (the
-command is from Plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
+command is from plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
treated equally.
19.5.3 '\normalsfcodes'
@@ -10162,7 +11364,7 @@ follows, as in '\TeX\ is nice'. (But using curly parentheses, as in
'\TeX{} is best', has the advantage of still working if the next
character is a period.) The other common use is that it marks a period
as ending an abbreviation instead of ending a sentence, as in 'So says
-Prof.\ Smith' (*note \@::).
+Prof.\ Smith' or 'Jones et al.\ (1993)' (*note \@::).
Under normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent
to backslash-space, '\ '.
@@ -10186,22 +11388,29 @@ In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence
spacing (*note \@::).
Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could
-cause confusion. But they also reduce LaTeX's options when it breaks
-lines into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters
-of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers.
-Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook.
+cause confusion. They also still allow hyphenation (of either of the
+tied words), so they are generally preferable to putting consecutive
+words in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+
+ They are also matters of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste,
+among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them
+from 'The TeXbook'.
* Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references:
'Chapter~12', or 'Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}', or
- 'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'. When cases are enumerated inline:
- '(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded'.
+ 'Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}'.
+
+ * When cases are enumerated inline: '(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is
+ (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded'.
* Between a number and its unit: '$745.7.8$~watts' (the 'siunitx'
package has a special facility for this) or '144~eggs'. This
includes between a month and a date: 'October~12' or '12~Oct'. In
general, in any expressions where numbers and abbreviations or
symbols are separated by a space: 'AD~565', or '2:50~pm', or
- 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or '\$$1.4$~billion'.
+ 'Boeing~747', or '268~Plains Road', or '\$$1.4$~billion'. Other
+ common choices here are a thin space (*note \thinspace &
+ \negthinspace::) and no space at all.
* When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: 'equals~$n$', or
'less than~$\epsilon$', or 'given~$X$', or 'modulo~$p^e$ for all
@@ -10215,13 +11424,10 @@ Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them from the TeXbook.
* Between symbols in series: '$1$,~$2$, or~$3$' or '$1$,~$2$,
\ldots,~$n$'.
- * Between a person's forenames and between multiple surnames:
- 'Donald~E. Knuth', or 'Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo', or 'Charles~XII' (but
- you must give TeX places to break the line so you may do 'Charles
- Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin').
-
- * Before a dash: 'pages 12~--14' or 'it is~--- it must be said~---
- plausible'.
+ * Between a person's given names and between multiple surnames:
+ 'Donald~E. Knuth', or 'Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo', or 'Charles~XII'--but
+ you must give TeX places to break the line so you might do 'Charles
+ Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin'.
19.8 '\thinspace' & '\negthinspace'
===================================
@@ -10231,21 +11437,25 @@ Synopsis, one of:
\thinspace
\negthinspace
- Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and -1/6em.
-These are the text mode equivalents of '\,' and '\!' (*note Spacing in
-math mode/\thinspace::). You can use '\,' as a synonym for '\thinspace'
-in text mode.
+ These produce unbreakable and unstretchable spaces of 1/6em and
+-1/6em, respectively. These are the text mode equivalents of '\,' and
+'\!' (*note Spacing in math mode/\thinspace::).
- The '\negthinspace' command is used in text mode mostly for fiddling
-with spaces. One common use of '\thinspace' is as the space between
-nested quotes.
+ You can use '\,' as a synonym for '\thinspace' in text mode.
+
+ One common use of '\thinspace' is as the space between nested quotes:
Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace''
Another use is that some style guides call for a '\thinspace' between an
-ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, though, think
-the three dots are quite enough already). Still another use is between
-initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
+ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, think the
+three dots and/or four dots are plenty). Another style-specific use is
+between initials, as in 'D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth'.
+
+ LaTeX provides a variety of similar spacing commands (*note Spacing
+in math mode::). With 'amsmath', or as of the 2020-10-01 LaTeX release,
+they can be used in text mode as well as math mode, including '\!' for
+'\negthinspace'; before that, they were available only in math mode.
19.9 '\/'
=========
@@ -10255,32 +11465,42 @@ Synopsis:
BEFORE-CHARACTER\/AFTER-CHARACTER
Insert an "italic correction", a small space defined by the font
-designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with
-whatever follows. When you use '\/', LaTeX takes the correction from
-the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been applied to
-the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
+designer for each character (possibly zero), to avoid the character
+colliding with whatever follows. When you use '\/', LaTeX takes the
+correction from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has
+been applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space.
Here, were it not for the '\/', the BEFORE-CHARACTER italic f would
hit the AFTER-CHARACTER roman H
\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H}
-because the italic letter leans far to the right.
+because the italic letter f leans far to the right.
If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don't insert an italic
-correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small height.
-However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal letters, the
-italic correction can help.
-
- When you use commands such as '\textit' or '\itshape' to change
-fonts, LaTeX will automatically insert any needed italic correction
-(*note Font styles::).
-
- Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is
-in the name 'pdf\/\TeX'.
-
- There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is
-done in a different way.
+correction since those punctuation symbols are so low to the baseline
+already. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as with normal
+letters, the italic correction can help. It is typically used between a
+switch from italic or slanted fonts to an upright font.
+
+ When you use commands such as '\emph' and '\textit' and '\textsl' to
+change fonts, LaTeX automatically inserts the italic correction when
+needed (*note Font styles::). However, declarations such as '\em' and
+'\itshape' and '\slshape' do not automatically insert italic
+corrections.
+
+ Upright characters can also have an italic correction. An example
+where this is needed is the name 'pdf\/\TeX'. However, most upright
+characters have a zero italic correction. Some font creators do not
+include italic correction values even for italic fonts.
+
+ Technically, LaTeX uses another font-specific value, the so-called
+slant parameter (namely '\fontdimen1'), to determine whether to possibly
+insert an italic correction, rather than tying the action to particular
+font commands.
+
+ There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; math spacing
+is done in a different way.
19.10 '\hrulefill' & '\dotfill'
===============================
@@ -10511,7 +11731,7 @@ component (*note Lengths::).
\vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex}
The new day dawned cold.
-(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip:: for common inter-paragraph
+(*Note \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip::, for common inter-paragraph
spaces.)
The '*'-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More
@@ -10605,7 +11825,7 @@ from the first 'addvspace'.
Now uncomment the second '\addvspace'. It does not make the gap 20pt
longer; instead the gap is the sum of '\baselineskip' and 20pt. So
-'\addvspace' in a sense does the opposite of its name -- it makes sure
+'\addvspace' in a sense does the opposite of its name--it makes sure
that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only
the largest one is used.
@@ -10643,14 +11863,14 @@ mode (*note Modes::) so it is not broken into lines. The '\mbox'
command is robust, while '\makebox' is fragile (*note \protect::).
Because 'text' is not broken into lines, you can use '\mbox' to
-prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate the
-table name, 'T-4'.
+prevent hyphenation. In this example, LaTeX will not hyphenate the tank
+name, 'T-34'.
- See Table~\mbox{T-4}
+ The soviet tank \mbox{T-34} is a symbol of victory against nazism.
- The first two command versions, '\mbox' and '\makebox', are roughly
-equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the TEXT.
-(They are like plain TeX's '\hbox'.)
+ The first two command synopsis versions, '\mbox' and '\makebox', are
+roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
+TEXT. (They are like plain TeX's '\hbox'.)
In the third version the optional argument WIDTH specifies the width
of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not equal the
@@ -10670,8 +11890,9 @@ the natural size you can say this.
\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
- For the fourth command version the optional argument POSITION gives
-position of the text within the box. It may take the following values:
+ For the fourth command synopsis version the optional argument
+POSITION gives position of the text within the box. It may take the
+following values:
'c'
The TEXT is centered (default).
@@ -10698,11 +11919,11 @@ puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions.
\pts{90}An African or European swallow?
- The right edge of the output '10 points ' (note the ending space)
-will be just before the 'What' (note the space after 'points'). You can
-use '\makebox' similarly when making graphics, such as in 'TikZ' or
-'Asymptote', where you put the edge of the text at a known location,
-regardless of the length of that text.
+ The right edge of the output '10 points ' (note the ending space
+after 'points') will be just before the 'What'. You can use '\makebox'
+similarly when making graphics, such as in 'TikZ' or 'Asymptote', where
+you put the edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the
+length of that text.
For boxes with frames see *note \fbox & \framebox::. For colors
see *note Colored boxes::.
@@ -10711,11 +11932,11 @@ see *note Colored boxes::.
'picture' environment, where the length is given in terms of
'\unitlength' (*note \makebox (picture)::).
- If you put a double-backslash into TEXT then LaTeX will not give you
-a new line; for instance '\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}' outputs 'abc defghi'
-while '\makebox{abc def \par ghi}' outputs 'abc def ghi', but neither go
-to a second line. To get multiple lines see *note \parbox:: and *note
-minipage::.
+ As TEXT is typeset in LR mode, neither a double backslash '\\' nor
+'\par' will give you a new line; for instance '\makebox{abc def \\ ghi}'
+outputs 'abc defghi' while '\makebox{abc def \par ghi}' outputs 'abc def
+ghi', both on a single line. To get multiple lines see *note \parbox::
+and *note minipage::.
20.2 '\fbox' & '\framebox'
==========================
@@ -10742,7 +11963,7 @@ a frame.
are roughly the same. As to the third and fourth invocations, the
optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as WIDTH and the
position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note \mbox &
-\makebox:: for the full description but here is an example creating an
+\makebox::, for the full description but here is an example creating an
empty box that is 1/4in wide.
\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}}
@@ -10779,7 +12000,7 @@ frame the result.
And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that.
\end{minipage}}
- *Note Colored boxes:: for colors other than black and white.
+ *Note Colored boxes::, for colors other than black and white.
The 'picture' environment has a version of this command where the
units depend on 'picture''s '\unitlength' (*note \framebox (picture)::).
@@ -10819,12 +12040,12 @@ CONTENTS. The CONTENTS is the text that is placed in that box. It
should not have any paragraph-making components.
There are three optional arguments, POSITION, HEIGHT, and INNER-POS.
-The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the 'parbox' with respect
-to the surrounding material. The possible values are 'c' or 'm' to make
-the vertical center of the 'parbox' lines up with the center of the
-adjacent line (this is the default), or 't' to match the top line of the
-'parbox' with the baseline of the surrounding material, or 'b' to match
-the bottom line.
+The POSITION gives the vertical alignment of the "parbox" with respect
+to the surrounding material. The supported values are 'c' or 'm' to
+make the vertical center of the parbox lines up with the center of the
+adjacent text line (this is the default), or 't' to match the top line
+of the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding material, or 'b' to
+match the bottom line.
The optional argument HEIGHT overrides the natural height of the box.
@@ -10846,10 +12067,10 @@ Synopsis, one of:
Raise or lower TEXT. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
- This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by
-lowering the vertical bar symbol.
+ This example makes a command for denoting the restriction of a
+function by lowering the vertical bar symbol.
- \newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
+ \newcommand*\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}}
$f\restricted{A}$
The first mandatory argument DISTANCE specifies how far to raise the
@@ -10868,7 +12089,7 @@ is the box's height plus its depth).
This will align two graphics on their top (*note Graphics::).
- \usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble
+ \usepackage{graphicx,calc} % in preamble
...
\begin{center}
\raisebox{1ex-\height}{%
@@ -10892,40 +12113,41 @@ Synopsis, one of:
\savebox{BOX-CMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
Typeset TEXT just as with '\makebox' (*note \mbox & \makebox::)
-except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it in a storage
-bin named BOX-CMD. The bin name BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, '\'.
-You must have previously allocated the bin BOX-CMD with '\newsavebox'
-(*note \newsavebox::).The '\sbox' command is robust while '\savebox' is
+except that LaTeX does not output it but instead saves it in a box
+register referred to by a variable named BOX-CMD. The variable name
+BOX-CMD begins with a backslash, '\'. You must have previously
+allocated the box register BOX-CMD with '\newsavebox' (*note
+\newsavebox::). The '\sbox' command is robust while '\savebox' is
fragile (*note \protect::).
- This creates and uses a bin.
+ This creates and uses a box register.
\newsavebox{\fullname}
\sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt}
...
\usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too!
Whenever we go out, the people always shout!
- There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
+ There goes \usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da.
-One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a '\newcommand' is
-efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. See
-the example below.
+One advantage of using and reusing a box register over a '\newcommand'
+macro variable is efficiency, that LaTeX need not repeatedly retypeset
+the contents. See the example below.
The first two command invocations, '\sbox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}' and
'\savebox{BOX-CMD}{TEXT}', are roughly equivalent. As to the third and
fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box width as
WIDTH, and the position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note
-\mbox & \makebox:: for the full description.
+\mbox & \makebox::, for the full description.
In the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
so it does not have line breaks (*note Modes::). If you use these then
LaTeX doesn't give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
-enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test}' and '\usebox{\newbin}' then you get
-'testtest', while if you enter '\sbox{\newbin}{test \par test}' and
-'\usebox{\newbin}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
+enter '\sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test}' and '\usebox{\newreg}' then you get
+'testtest', while if you enter '\sbox{\newreg}{test \par test}' and
+'\usebox{\newreg}' then you get 'test test', but no error or warning.
To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
- \savebox{\abin}{%
+ \savebox{\areg}{%
\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
\begin{enumerate}
\item First item
@@ -10933,15 +12155,15 @@ To fix this use a '\parbox' or 'minipage' as here.
\end{enumerate}
\end{minipage}}
...
- \usebox{\abin}
+ \usebox{\areg}
- As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin's contents, this
-puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the
-header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
+ As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register's contents,
+this puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in
+the header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
\usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble
- \newsavebox{\sealbin}
- \savebox{\sealbin}{%
+ \newsavebox{\sealreg}
+ \savebox{\sealreg}{%
\setlength{\unitlength}{1in}%
\begin{picture}(0,0)%
\put(1.5,-2.5){%
@@ -10951,13 +12173,13 @@ header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
\end{tabular}}
\end{picture}%
}
- \markright{\usebox{\sealbin}}
+ \markright{\usebox{\sealreg}}
\pagestyle{headings}
The 'picture' environment is good for fine-tuning the placement.
- If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like
-'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin'.
+ If the register '\noreg' has not already been defined then you get
+something like 'Undefined control sequence. <argument> \noreg'.
20.6 'lrbox'
============
@@ -10968,24 +12190,25 @@ Synopsis:
TEXT
\end{lrbox}
- The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the bin 'BOX-CMD'. The
-BOX-CMD must begin with a backslash. You must create this bin in
-advance with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). This is the
-environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands, and is
-equivalent to them. *Note \sbox & \savebox:: for the full information.
+ This is the environment form of the '\sbox' and '\savebox' commands,
+and is equivalent to them. for the full description, *Note \sbox &
+\savebox::.
- In this example the environment is convenient for entering the
-'tabular'.
+ The TEXT inside the environment is saved in the box register referred
+to by variable 'BOX-CMD'. The variable name BOX-CMD must begin with a
+backslash, '\'. You must allocate this box register in advance with
+'\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::). In this example the environment is
+convenient for entering the 'tabular'.
- \newsavebox{\jhbin}
- \begin{lrbox}{\jhbin}
+ \newsavebox{\jhreg}
+ \begin{lrbox}{\jhreg}
\begin{tabular}{c}
\includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\
Jim Hef{}feron
\end{tabular}
\end{lrbox}
...
- \usebox{\jhbin}
+ \usebox{\jhreg}
20.7 '\usebox'
==============
@@ -10994,10 +12217,11 @@ Synopsis:
\usebox{BOX-CMD}
- Produce the box most recently saved in the bin BOX-CMD by the
-commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment. *Note \sbox
-& \savebox:: for more information and examples. (Note that BOX-CMD
-starts with a backslash.) This command is robust (*note \protect::).
+ Produce the box most recently saved in the box register BOX-CMD by
+the commands '\sbox' or '\savebox', or the 'lrbox' environment. For
+more information and examples, *Note \sbox & \savebox::. (Note that the
+variable name BOX-CMD starts with a backslash, '\'.) This command is
+robust (*note \protect::).
21 Color
********
@@ -11183,7 +12407,7 @@ style but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in
the synopses.
Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
- {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team.
+ {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team.
The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
Color models::). For instance, while 'rgb' takes three numbers, 'gray'
@@ -11332,7 +12556,7 @@ with a '.def' extension, such as 'pdftex.def'.
'\includegraphics' command).
'draft'
- For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead the file name is
+ For each graphic file, it is not shown but instead its file name is
printed in a box of the correct size. In order to determine the
size, the file must be present.
@@ -11373,14 +12597,15 @@ distribution's documentation.
Synopsis:
- \graphicspath{LIST OF DIR NAMES INSIDE CURLY BRACKETS}
+ \graphicspath{LIST OF DIRECTORIES INSIDE CURLY BRACES}
Declare a list of directories to search for graphics files. This
allows you to later say something like '\includegraphics{lion.png}'
instead of having to give its path.
- LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory.
-The declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
+ LaTeX always looks for graphic files first in the current directory
+(and the output directory, if specified; *note output directory::). The
+declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
'pix', and then '../pix'.
\usepackage{graphicx} % or graphics; put in preamble
@@ -11408,9 +12633,9 @@ the current directory,
...
\usepackage{lion.png}
-for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the file
-name and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and then
-'../pix/lion.png'. This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
+for each of the listed directories, LaTeX concatenates it with the
+filename and searches for the result, checking for 'pix/lion.png' and
+then '../pix/lion.png'. This algorithm means that the '\graphicspath'
command does not recursively search subdirectories: if you issue
'\graphicspath{{a/}}' and the graphic is in 'a/b/lion.png' then LaTeX
will not find it. It also means that you can use absolute paths such as
@@ -11449,7 +12674,7 @@ files.
...
\includegraphics{lion} % will find lion.png before lion.pdf
-Because the file name 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
+Because the filename 'lion' does not have a period, LaTeX uses the
extension list. For each directory in the graphics path (*note
\graphicspath::), LaTeX will try the extensions in the order given. If
it does not find such a file after trying all the directories and
@@ -11464,7 +12689,9 @@ Windows platform is not case sensitive.
document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, the
most recent 'pdftex.def' has this extension list.
- .png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+ .pdf,.png,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PDF,.PNG,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2
+
+ To change the order, use the 'grfext' package.
You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it
more than once. Show its value with
@@ -11499,7 +12726,7 @@ extension not covered by another rule, so it covers 'filename.1',
EXTENSION
The file extension to which this rule applies. The extension is
anything after and including the first dot in the filename. Use
- the Kleene star, '*', to denote the default behaviour for all
+ the Kleene star, '*', to denote the default behavior for all
undeclared extensions.
TYPE
@@ -11530,7 +12757,7 @@ SIZE-FILE EXTENSION
COMMAND
A command that will be applied to the file. This is very often
- left blank. This command must start with a single backward quote.
+ left empty. This command must start with a single backward quote.
Thus, '\DeclareGraphicsRule{.eps.gz}{eps}{.eps.bb}{`gunzip -c #1}'
specifies that any file with the extension '.eps.gz' should be
treated as an 'eps' file, with the BoundingBox information stored
@@ -11590,10 +12817,10 @@ to search for the file, *note \graphicspath::.
example is '\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}'.
The '\includegraphics{FILENAME}' command decides on the type of
-graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot. You can use FILENAME
-with no dot, as in '\includegraphics{turing}' and then LaTeX tries a
-sequence of extensions such as '.png' and '.pdf' until it finds a file
-with that extension (*note \DeclareGraphicsExtensions::).
+graphic by splitting FILENAME on the first dot. You can instead use
+FILENAME with no dot, as in '\includegraphics{turing}', and then LaTeX
+tries a sequence of extensions such as '.png' and '.pdf' until it finds
+a file with that extension (*note \DeclareGraphicsExtensions::).
If your file name contains dots before the extension then you can
hide them with curly braces, as in
@@ -11602,9 +12829,9 @@ hide them with curly braces, as in
below. This and other filename issues are also handled with the package
'grffile'.
- This example puts a graphic in a figure environment so LaTeX can move
-it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward (*note
-figure::).
+ This example puts a graphic in a 'figure' environment so LaTeX can
+move it to the next page if fitting it on the current page is awkward
+(*note figure::).
\begin{figure}
\centering
@@ -11668,7 +12895,7 @@ two will end with different widths and heights.
There are many options. The primary ones are listed first.
Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
-traditionally referred to as its bounding box (distinct from the
+traditionally referred to as its "bounding box" (distinct from the
PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic's printed area may
go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
@@ -11681,7 +12908,7 @@ graphic.
convenient is '\linewidth', or in a two-column document,
'\columnwidth' (*note Page layout parameters::). An example is
that by using the 'calc' package you can make the graphic be 1 cm
- narrow than the width of the text with
+ narrower than the width of the text with
'\includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}'.
'height'
@@ -11712,7 +12939,7 @@ graphic.
'scale'
Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its
nominal size, enter '\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}'. This
- number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the
+ number may be any value; a number between 0 and 1 will shrink the
graphic and a negative number will reflect it.
'angle'
@@ -11740,10 +12967,10 @@ graphic.
'viewport'
Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments,
separated by spaces and given in TeX dimensions, as with
- '\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. The
- dimensions default to big points, 'bp'. They are taken relative to
- the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the 'trim'
- option.
+ '\includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}'. When
+ the unit is omitted, the dimensions default to big points, 'bp'.
+ They are taken relative to the origin specified by the bounding
+ box. See also the 'trim' option.
'trim'
Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments,
@@ -11791,7 +13018,7 @@ graphic.
'quiet'
Do not write information to the log. You can set it with
'quiet=true' or just specified it with
- '\includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}',
+ '\includegraphics[...,quiet,...]{...}',
'draft'
If you set it with 'draft=true' or just specify it with
@@ -11860,7 +13087,7 @@ the file 'lion.xxx' as though it were 'lion.png'. For more on these,
'command'
Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in
- conjunction with the option 'type'. *Note Command line options::
+ conjunction with the option 'type'. *Note Command line options::,
for a discussion of enabling the '\write18' functionality to run
external commands.
@@ -11878,7 +13105,7 @@ Synopsis if you use the 'graphics' package:
Put MATERIAL in a box and rotate it ANGLE degrees counterclockwise.
- This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees.
+ This example rotates the table column heads forty-five degrees.
\begin{tabular}{ll}
\rotatebox{45}{Character} &\rotatebox{45}{NATO phonetic} \\
@@ -12003,7 +13230,8 @@ meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
example, the percent sign '%' is for comments. They are called
-"reserved characters" or "special characters".
+"reserved characters" or "special characters". They are all discussed
+elsewhere in this manual.
# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
@@ -12014,12 +13242,13 @@ will produce '$1.23' in your output.
As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
use '\~{}' (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
-receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text body font
+receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a text body font
circumflex use '\^{}'. To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
enter '\textbackslash{}'.
To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use '\verb!!'
-as below (the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the lines).
+as below (the double backslash '\\' is only there to split the lines in
+the output).
\begin{center}
\# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
@@ -12036,12 +13265,13 @@ Synopsis:
\MakeUppercase{TEXT}
\MakeLowercase{TEXT}
- Change the case of characters. The TeX primitives commands
-'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' only work for American characters. The
-LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' commands also
-change characters accessed by commands such as '\ae' or '\aa'. The
-commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have
-moving arguments (*note \protect::).
+ Change the case of characters. The TeX primitive commands
+'\uppercase' and '\lowercase' are set up by default to work only with
+the 26 letters a-z and A-Z. The LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and
+'\MakeLowercase' commands also change characters accessed by commands
+such as '\ae' or '\aa'. The commands '\MakeUppercase' and
+'\MakeLowercase' are robust but they have moving arguments (*note
+\protect::).
These commands do not change the case of letters used in the name of
a command within TEXT. But they do change the case of every other Latin
@@ -12070,35 +13300,45 @@ standard LaTeX commands '\MakeUppercase' and '\MakeLowerCase'.
To uppercase only the first letter of words, you can use the package
'mfirstuc'.
+ Handling all the casing rules specified by Unicode, e.g., for
+non-Latin scripts, is a much bigger job than anything envisioned in the
+original TeX and LaTeX. It has been implemented in the 'expl3' package
+as of 2020. The article "Case changing: From TeX primitives to the
+Unicode algorithm", (Joseph Wright, 'TUGboat' 41:1,
+<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-1/tb127wright-case.pdf>), gives a good
+overview of the topic, past and present.
+
23.3 Symbols by font position
=============================
You can access any character of the current font using its number with
the '\symbol' command. For example, the visible space character used in
-the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so it can be typed as
-'\symbol{32}'.
+the '\verb*' command has the code decimal 32 in the standard Computer
+Modern typewriter font, so it can be typed as '\symbol{32}'.
You can also specify numbers in octal (base 8) by using a ''' prefix,
-or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the previous example
-could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
+or hexadecimal (base 16) with a '"' prefix, so the visible space at 32
+decimal could also be written as '\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
23.4 Text symbols
=================
LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
-available in OT1. Unless you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX then you may
-need to load the 'textcomp' package.
+available in OT1. As of the LaTeX February 2020 release, all symbols
+are available by default; before that, it was necessary to use the
+'textcomp' package for some (technically, those in the 'TS1' font
+encoding).
'\copyright'
'\textcopyright'
(C) The copyright symbol.
'\dag'
- U+2020 The dagger symbol (in text).
+ † The dagger symbol (in text).
'\ddag'
- U+2021 The double dagger symbol (in text).
+ ‡ The double dagger symbol (in text).
'\LaTeX'
The LaTeX logo.
@@ -12106,11 +13346,11 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
'\LaTeXe'
The LaTeX2e logo.
-'\guillemotleft (<<)'
-'\guillemotright (>>)'
-'\guilsinglleft (<)'
-'\guilsinglright (>)'
- <<, >>, <, > Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
+'\guillemotleft («)'
+'\guillemotright (»)'
+'\guilsinglleft (‹)'
+'\guilsinglright (›)'
+ «, », ‹, › Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
in French.
'\ldots'
@@ -12124,22 +13364,22 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
'\P'
'\textparagraph'
- U+00B6 Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+ ¶ Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
'\pounds'
'\textsterling'
- # English pounds sterling.
+ £ English pounds sterling.
-'\quotedblbase (,,)'
-'\quotesinglbase (,)'
- ,, and , Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
+'\quotedblbase („)'
+'\quotesinglbase (‚)'
+ „ and ‚ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
'\rq'
' Right (closing) quote.
'\S'
'\textsection'
- U+00A7 Section sign.
+ § Section sign.
'\TeX'
The TeX logo.
@@ -12160,10 +13400,10 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
| Vertical bar.
'\textbardbl'
- U+23F8 Double vertical bar.
+ ⏸ Double vertical bar.
'\textbigcircle'
- U+25EF Big circle symbol.
+ ◯, Big circle symbol.
'\textbraceleft'
{ Left brace.
@@ -12175,7 +13415,7 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
* Bullet.
'\textcircled{LETTER}'
- U+24B6 Circle around LETTER.
+ Ⓐ, Circle around LETTER.
'\textcompwordmark'
'\textcapitalcompwordmark'
@@ -12187,49 +13427,70 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
while the '\textascendercompwordmark' form has the ascender height.
'\textdagger'
- U+2020 Dagger.
+ † Dagger.
'\textdaggerdbl'
- U+2021 Double dagger.
+ ‡ Double dagger.
'\textdollar (or '\$')'
$ Dollar sign.
'\textemdash (or '---')'
- -- Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in 'The playoffs --- if you
- are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- is more like a
- sprint.').
+ -- Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or
+ parentheses, as in ''The playoffs---if you're lucky enough to make
+ the playoffs---are more like a sprint.'' Conventions for spacing
+ around em-dashes vary widely.
'\textendash (or '--')'
- - En-dash (used for ranges, as in 'See pages 12--14').
+ - En-dash. Used for ranges, as in ''see pages 12--14''.
'\texteuro'
- The Euro symbol: Euro. For an alternative glyph design, try the
- 'eurosym' package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own
- Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC).
+ The Euro currency symbol: €.
+
+ For an alternative glyph design, try the 'eurosym' package; also,
+ most fonts nowadays come with their own Euro symbol (Unicode
+ U+20AC).
'\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
- ! Upside down exclamation point.
+ ¡ Upside down exclamation point.
+
+'\textfiguredash'
+ Dash used between numerals, Unicode U+2012. Defined in the June
+ 2021 release of LaTeX. When used in pdfTeX, approximated by an
+ en-dash; with a Unicode engine, either typesets the glyph if
+ available in the current font, or writes the usual "Missing
+ character" warning to the log file.
'\textgreater'
> Greater than symbol.
+'\texthorizontalbar'
+ Horizontal bar character, Unicode U+2015. Defined in the June 2021
+ release of LaTeX. Behavior as with '\textfiguredash' above; the
+ pdfTeX approximation is an em-dash.
+
'\textless'
< Less than symbol.
'\textleftarrow'
- U+2190 Left arrow.
+ ←, Left arrow.
+
+'\textnonbreakinghyphen'
+ Non-breaking hyphen character, Unicode U+2011. Defined in the June
+ 2021 release of LaTeX. Behavior as with '\textfiguredash' above;
+ the pdfTeX approximation is a regular ASCII hyphen (with breaks
+ disallowed after).
'\textordfeminine'
'\textordmasculine'
- a, o Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
+ ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols.
'\textperiodcentered'
- U+00B7 Centered period.
+ · Centered period.
'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
- ? Upside down question mark.
+ ¿ Upside down question mark.
'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
" Double left quote.
@@ -12244,7 +13505,7 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
' Single right quote.
'\textquotesingle'
- U+0027 Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
+ ', Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
'\textquotestraightbase'
'\textquotestraightdblbase'
@@ -12254,33 +13515,35 @@ need to load the 'textcomp' package.
(R) Registered symbol.
'\textrightarrow'
- U+2192 Right arrow.
+ →, Right arrow.
'\textthreequartersemdash'
- U+FE58 "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+ ﹘, "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
'\texttrademark'
- U+2122 Trademark symbol.
+ ™ Trademark symbol.
'\texttwelveudash'
- U+FE58 "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+ ﹘, "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
'\textunderscore'
_ Underscore.
'\textvisiblespace'
- U+2423 Visible space symbol.
+ ␣, Visible space symbol.
23.5 Accents
============
LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
-through the 'babel' package and related support if you are using
-pdfLaTeX, or 'polyglossia' if you are using XeLaTeX or LuaLaTeX. This
-section does not cover that support. It only lists the core LaTeX
-commands for creating accented characters. The '\capital...' commands
-shown here produce alternative forms for use with capital letters.
-These are not available with OT1.
+provided through the core 'babel' package, which supports pdfLaTeX,
+XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX. The 'polyglossia' package provides similar
+support with the latter two engines.
+
+ This section does not cover that support. It only lists the core
+LaTeX commands for creating accented characters. The '\capital...'
+commands shown here produce alternative forms for use with capital
+letters. These are not available with OT1.
Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated
with lowercase 'o'.
@@ -12291,33 +13554,33 @@ accented.
'\"'
'\capitaldieresis'
- o" Umlaut (dieresis).
+ ö Umlaut (dieresis).
'\''
'\capitalacute'
- o' Acute accent.
+ ó Acute accent.
'\.'
- o. Dot accent.
+ ȯ Dot accent.
'\='
'\capitalmacron'
- o= Macron (overbar) accent.
+ ō Macron (overbar) accent.
'\^'
'\capitalcircumflex'
- o^ Circumflex (hat) accent.
+ ô Circumflex (hat) accent.
'\`'
'\capitalgrave'
- o` Grave accent.
+ ò Grave accent.
'\~'
'\capitaltilde'
- n~ Tilde accent.
+ ñ Tilde accent.
'\b'
- o_ Bar accent underneath.
+ o̲ Bar accent underneath.
Related to this, '\underbar{TEXT}' produces a bar under TEXT. The
argument is always processed in LR mode (*note Modes::). The bar
@@ -12327,37 +13590,81 @@ accented.
'\c'
'\capitalcedilla'
- c, Cedilla accent underneath.
+ ç Cedilla accent underneath.
'\d'
'\capitaldotaccent'
- .o Dot accent underneath.
+ ọ Dot accent underneath.
'\H'
'\capitalhungarumlaut'
- o'' Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
+ ő Long Hungarian umlaut accent.
'\k'
'\capitalogonek'
- o; Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
+ ǫ Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding.
'\r'
'\capitalring'
- o* Ring accent.
+ o̊ Ring accent.
'\t'
'\capitaltie'
'\newtie'
'\capitalnewtie'
- oo[ Tie-after accent. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
+ oo͡ Tie-after accent. The '\newtie' form is centered in its box.
'\u'
'\capitalbreve'
- o( Breve accent.
+ ŏ Breve accent.
'\v'
'\capitalcaron'
- o< Ha'c<ek (check, caron) accent.
+ ǒ Háček (check, caron) accent.
+
+23.5.1 '\accent'
+----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \accent NUMBER CHARACTER
+
+ A TeX primitive command used to generate accented characters from
+accent marks and letters. The accent mark is selected by NUMBER, a
+numeric argument, followed by a space and then a CHARACTER argument
+constructs the accented character in the current font.
+
+ These are accented 'e' characters.
+
+ \accent18 e
+ \accent20 e
+ \accent21 e
+ \accent22 e
+ \accent23 e
+
+The first is a grave, the second is breve, etc.
+
+ The position of the accent is determined by the font designer and so
+the outcome of '\accent' use may differ between fonts. In LaTeX it is
+desirable to have glyphs for accented characters rather than building
+them using '\accent'. Using glyphs that already contain the accented
+characters (as in T1 encoding) allows correct hyphenation whereas
+'\accent' disables hyphenation (specifically with OT1 font encoding
+where accented glyphs are absent).
+
+ There can be an optional font change between NUMBER and CHARACTER.
+Note also that this command sets the '\spacefactor' to 1000 (*note
+\spacefactor::).
+
+ An unavoidable characteristic of some Cyrillic letters and the
+majority of accented Cyrillic letters is that they must be assembled
+from multiple elements (accents, modifiers, etc.) while '\accent'
+provides for a single accent mark and a single letter combination.
+There are also cases where accents must appear between letters that
+\accent does not support. Still other cases exist where the letters I
+and J have dots above their lowercase counterparts that conflict with
+dotted accent marks. The use of '\accent' in these cases will not work
+as it cannot analyze upper/lower case.
23.6 Additional Latin letters
=============================
@@ -12368,15 +13675,15 @@ English.
'\aa'
'\AA'
- aa and AA.
+ å and Å.
'\ae'
'\AE'
- ae and AE.
+ æ and Æ.
'\dh'
'\DH'
- Icelandic letter eth: d and D. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
+ Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð. Not available with OT1 encoding, you
need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font encoding,
such as T1.
@@ -12392,7 +13699,7 @@ English.
'\l'
'\L'
- /l and /L.
+ ł and Ł.
'\ng'
'\NG'
@@ -12400,23 +13707,76 @@ English.
'\o'
'\O'
- /o and /O.
+ ø and Ø.
'\oe'
'\OE'
- oe and OE.
+ œ and Œ.
'\ss'
'\SS'
- ss and SS.
+ ß and SS.
'\th'
'\TH'
- Icelandic letter thorn: th and TH. Not available with OT1 encoding,
+ Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ. Not available with OT1 encoding,
you need the 'fontenc' package to select an alternate font
encoding, such as T1.
-23.7 '\rule'
+23.7 'inputenc' package
+=======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usepackage[ENCODING-NAME]{inputenc}
+
+ Declare the input file's text encoding to be ENCODING-NAME. The
+default, if this package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically,
+specifying the encoding name is optional, but in practice it is not
+useful to omit it.
+
+ In a computer file, the characters are stored according to a scheme
+called the "encoding". There are many different encodings. The
+simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough
+for most of the world's languages. For instance, to typeset the
+a-umlaut character ä in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the sequence
+'\"a' is used. This would make source files for anything but English
+hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive encoding is more
+convenient.
+
+ The modern encoding standard, in some ways a union of the others, is
+UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for
+LaTeX since 2018.
+
+ The 'inputenc' package is how LaTeX knows what encoding is used. For
+instance, the following command explicitly says that the input file is
+UTF-8 (note the lack of a dash).
+
+ \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+
+ Caution: use 'inputenc' only with the pdfTeX engine (*note TeX
+engines::). (The XeTeX and LuaTeX engines assume that the input file is
+UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke LaTeX with either the 'xelatex' command
+or the 'lualatex' command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with
+'inputenc', such as 'latin1', then you will get the error 'inputenc is
+not designed for xetex or luatex'.
+
+ An 'inputenc' package error such as 'Invalid UTF-8 byte "96' means
+that some of the material in the input file does not follow the encoding
+scheme. Often these errors come from copying material from a document
+that uses a different encoding than the input file; this one is a left
+single quote from a web page using 'latin1' inside a LaTeX input file
+that uses UTF-8. The simplest solution is to replace the non-UTF-8
+character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a LaTeX equivalent command
+or character.
+
+ In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a
+variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be
+necessary. Use the command '\inputencoding{ENCODING-NAME}'. The most
+common values for ENCODING-NAME are: 'ascii', 'latin1', 'latin2',
+'latin3', 'latin4', 'latin5', 'latin9', 'latin10', and 'utf8'.
+
+23.8 '\rule'
============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -12426,8 +13786,8 @@ Synopsis, one of:
Produce a "rule", a filled-in rectangle.
- This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol,
-often used to mark the end of a proof.
+ This example produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos
+symbol, or just "qed", often used to mark the end of a proof:
\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
@@ -12449,9 +13809,9 @@ thickness is common in LaTeX.
A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in
the output, but can cause LaTeX to change the output around it. *Note
-\strut:: for examples.
+\strut::, for examples.
-23.8 '\today'
+23.9 '\today'
=============
Synopsis:
@@ -12515,7 +13875,7 @@ with five included files.
This will bring in material from 'pref.tex', 'chap1.tex', 'chap2.tex',
'append.tex', and 'bib.tex'. If you compile this file, and then comment
-out all of the lines inside '\includeonly{...}' except for 'chap1,' and
+out all of the lines inside '\includeonly{...}' except for 'chap1', and
compile again, then LaTeX will only process the material in the first
chapter. Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to
print. However, the advantage of the '\includeonly' command is that
@@ -12523,7 +13883,7 @@ LaTeX will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference
information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in
your output correctly.
- *Note Larger book template:: for another example of '\includeonly'.
+ *Note Larger book template::, for another example of '\includeonly'.
24.1 '\endinput'
================
@@ -12545,12 +13905,13 @@ and this is 'chap1.tex'.
This will not appear.
This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end
-of a file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during
-mailing. It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize
-errors is to put '\endinput' halfway through the included file and see
-if the error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error,
-moving '\endinput' to halfway through that area further narrows down the
-location. This process rapidly finds the offending line.
+of a file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added if the file
+is transmitted in the body of an email. It is also useful for
+debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to put '\endinput' halfway
+through the included file and see if the error disappears. Now, knowing
+which half contains the error, moving '\endinput' to halfway through
+that area further narrows down the location. This process rapidly finds
+the offending line.
After reading '\endinput', LaTeX continues to read to the end of the
line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless.
@@ -12575,10 +13936,12 @@ document.
The '\include' command does three things: it executes '\clearpage'
(*note \clearpage & \cleardoublepage::), then it inputs the material
from 'FILENAME.tex' into the document, and then it does another
-'\clearpage'. This command can only appear in the document body. The
-'\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by LaTeX under
-subsequent '\include' commands. Its list of filenames is
-comma-separated, and it can only appear in the preamble.
+'\clearpage'. This command can only appear in the document body.
+
+ The '\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by LaTeX
+under subsequent '\include' commands. Its list of filenames is
+comma-separated. It must appear in the preamble or even earlier, e.g.,
+the command line; it can't appear in the document body.
This example root document, 'constitution.tex', brings in three
files, 'preamble.tex', 'articles.tex', and 'amendments.tex'.
@@ -12605,7 +13968,7 @@ file just for editing convenience.
Running LaTeX on 'constitution.tex' makes the material from the three
files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files
-'preamble.aux', 'articles.aux', and 'amendments.tex'. These contain
+'preamble.aux', 'articles.aux', and 'amendments.aux'. These contain
information such as page numbers and cross-references (*note Cross
references::). If you now comment out '\includeonly''s lines with
'preamble' and 'amendments' and run LaTeX again then the resulting
@@ -12620,9 +13983,9 @@ include all the files you call for with '\include' commands.
The '\include' command makes a new page. To avoid that, see *note
\input:: (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary information).
- *Note Larger book template:: for another example using '\include' and
-'\includeonly'. That example also uses '\input' for some material that
-will not necessarily start on a new page.
+ *Note Larger book template::, for another example using '\include'
+and '\includeonly'. That example also uses '\input' for some material
+that will not necessarily start on a new page.
File names can involve paths.
@@ -12670,7 +14033,7 @@ also create 'athiesm.aux'.)
If you '\include' the root file in itself then you first get 'LaTeX
Error: Can be used only in preamble.' Later runs get 'TeX capacity
exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]'. To fix this, you must remove
-the inclusion '\include{root}' but also delete the file 'ROOT.aux' and
+the inclusion '\include{ROOT}' but also delete the file 'ROOT.aux' and
rerun LaTeX.
24.3 '\input'
@@ -12744,7 +14107,7 @@ LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter
and section listings but not subsection listings, because the '\section'
-command has level 1. *Note Sectioning:: for level numbers of the
+command has level 1. *Note Sectioning::, for level numbers of the
sectioning units. For more on the 'tocdepth' *note
Sectioning/tocdepth::.
@@ -12754,7 +14117,7 @@ book template::.
If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a
'\newpage' command after the '\tableofcontents' command, as above.
- To make the table of contents LaTeX stores the information in an
+ To make the table of contents, LaTeX stores the information in an
auxiliary file named 'ROOT-FILE.toc' (*note Splitting the input::). For
example, this LaTeX file 'test.tex'
@@ -12765,55 +14128,119 @@ example, this LaTeX file 'test.tex'
\subsection{First subsection}
...
-writes the following line to 'test.toc'.
+writes these lines to 'test.toc'.
\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2}
\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2}
-The 'section' or 'subsection' is the sectioning unit. The hook
-'\numberline' lets you to change how the information appears in the
-table of contents. Of its two arguments, '1' or '1.1' is the sectioning
-unit number and 'First section' or 'First subsection' is the title.
-Finally, '2' is the page number on which the sectioning units start.
-
- One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to
-get the contents page correct you must run LaTeX twice, once to store
-the information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that
-you run LaTeX on a new document, the table of contents page will be
-empty except for its 'Contents' header. Just run it again.
+Each line contains a single command, '\contentsline' (*note
+\contentsline::). The first argument, the 'section' or 'subsection', is
+the sectioning unit. The second argument has two components. The hook
+'\numberline' determines how the sectioning number, '1' or '1.1',
+appears in the table of contents (*note \numberline::). The remainder
+of the second argument of '\contentsline', 'First section' or 'First
+subsection', is the sectioning title text. Finally, the third argument,
+'2', is the page number on which this sectioning unit starts.
+
+ To typeset these lines, the document class provides '\l@SECTION-UNIT'
+commands such as '\l@section{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}' and
+'\l@subsection{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}'. These commands often use the
+'\@dottedtocline' command (*note \@dottedtocline::).
+
+ A consequence of LaTeX's strategy of using auxiliary files is that to
+get the correct information in the document you must run LaTeX twice,
+once to store the information and the second time to retrieve it. In
+the ordinary course of writing a document authors run LaTeX a number of
+times, but you may notice that the first time that you compile a new
+document, the table of contents page will be empty except for its
+'Contents' header. Just run LaTeX again.
The commands '\listoffigures' and '\listoftables' produce a list of
-figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the contents
-commands; for instance, these work with information stored in '.lof' and
-'.lot' files.
+figures and a list of tables. Their information is stored in files with
+extension '.lof' and '.lot'. They work the same way as
+'\tableofcontents' but the latter is more common, so we use it for most
+examples.
+
+ You can manually add material to the table of contents, the list of
+figures, and the list of tables. For instance, add a line about a
+section to the table of contents with
+'\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{TEXT}'. (*note \addcontentsline::).
+Add arbitrary material, that is, non-line material, with
+'\addtocontents', as with the command
+'\addtocontents{lof}{\protect\vspace{2ex}}', which adds vertical space
+to the list of figures (*note \addtocontents::).
+
+ Lines in the table of contents, the list of figures, and the list of
+tables, have four parts. First is an indent. Next is a box into which
+sectioning numbers are placed, and then the third box holds the title
+text, such as 'First section'. Finally there is a box up against the
+right margin, inside of which LaTeX puts the page number box. For the
+indent and the width of the number box, *note \@dottedtocline::. The
+right margin box has width '\@tocrmarg' and the page number is flush
+right in that space, inside a box of width '\@pnumwidth'. By default
+'\@tocrmarg' is '2.55em' and '\@pnumwidth' is '1.55em'. Change these as
+with '\renewcommand{\@tocrmarg}{3.5em}'.
- To change the header for the table of contents page do something like
-the first line here.
+ CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
+and tables (*note CTAN::). The package 'tocloft' is convenient for
+adjusting some aspects of the default such as spacing. And,
+'tocbibbind' will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to
+the table of contents.
+
+ To change the header for the table of contents page, do something
+like these commands before you call '\tableofcontents', etc.
- \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+ \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of Contents}
\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots}
- \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables}
+ \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Specifications}
-Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two.
-Internationalization packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia' will
-change the headers depending on the chosen base language.
- CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures
-and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the
-default, such as spacing, is 'tocloft'. And, 'tocbibbind' will
-automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of
-contents.
+ Internationalization packages such as 'babel' or 'polyglossia' will
+change these headers depending on the chosen base language.
+
+25.1.1 '\@dottedtocline'
+------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
-25.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+ \@dottedtocline{SECTION-LEVEL-NUM}{INDENT}{NUMWIDTH}{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}
+
+ Used internally by LaTeX to format an entry line in the table of
+contents, list of figures, or list of tables. Authors do not directly
+enter '\@dottedtocline' commands.
+
+ This command is typically used by '\l@section', '\l@subsection',
+etc., to format the content lines. For example, the 'article.cls' file
+contains these definitions:
+
+ \newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+ \newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
+ \newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
+
+In this example, '\@dottedcline' appears to have been given only three
+arguments. But tracing the internal code shows that it picks up the
+final TEXT and PAGENUMBER arguments in the synopsis from a call to
+'\contentsline'.
+
+ Between the box for the title text of a section and the right margin
+box, these '\@dottedtocline' commands insert "leaders", that is,
+evenly-spaced dots. The dot-to-dot space is given by the command
+'\@dotsep'. By default it is 4.5 (it is in math units, which are
+'1/18' em. Change it using '\renewcommand', as in
+'\renewcommand{\@dotsep}{3.5}'.
+
+ In the default book class, LaTeX does not use dotted leaders for the
+Part and Chapter table entries, and in the default article class it does
+not use dotted leaders for Section entries.
+
+25.1.2 '\addcontentsline'
-------------------------
Synopsis:
\addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}
- Add an entry to the file specified by EXT. Usually EXT is one of
-'toc' for the table of contents, 'lof' for the list of figures, or 'lot'
-for the list of tables.
+ Add an entry to the auxiliary file with extension EXT.
The following will result in an 'Appendices' line in the table of
contents.
@@ -12827,20 +14254,23 @@ where it appears in the input file.
The '\addcontentsline' command writes information to the file
'ROOT-NAME.EXT'. It writes that information as the text of the command
'\contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{NUM}', where 'NUM' is the current value of
-counter 'UNIT'. The most common case is the table of contents and there
-NUM is the page number of the first page of UNIT.
+counter 'UNIT' (*note \contentsline::). The most common case is the
+table of contents and there NUM is the page number of the first page of
+UNIT.
This command is invoked by the sectioning commands '\chapter', etc.,
and also by '\caption' inside a float environment. But it is also used
-by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface unnumbered, you
-may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that does not put in table of
-contents information, so you can enter it manually, as here.
+by authors. For example, an author writing a book whose style is to
+have an unnumbered preface may use the starred '\chapter*'. But that
+command leaves out table of contents information, which can be entered
+manually, as here.
\chapter*{Preface}
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface}
In the '.toc' file LaTeX will put the line '\contentsline
-{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note the page number '3'.
+{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}'; note that the page number '3' is
+automatically generated by the system, not entered manually.
All of the arguments for '\addcontentsline' are required.
@@ -12879,7 +14309,7 @@ move '\addcontentsline' into the file being included.
then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
will not make sense.
-25.1.2 '\addtocontents'
+25.1.3 '\addtocontents'
-----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -12888,8 +14318,8 @@ Synopsis:
Add TEXT, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to the
auxiliary file with extension EXT. This is most commonly used for the
-table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also applies
-to the list of figures and list of tables.
+table of contents so that is the discussion here, but it also applies to
+the list of figures and list of tables.
This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the
'Contents' header.
@@ -12897,6 +14327,24 @@ to the list of figures and list of tables.
\tableofcontents\newpage
\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}}
+This puts the word 'Page', in boldface, above the column of page numbers
+and after the header.
+
+ \tableofcontents
+ \addtocontents{toc}{~\hfill\textbf{Page}\par}
+ \chapter{...}
+
+This adds a line announcing work by a new author.
+
+ \addtocontents{toc}{%
+ \protect\vspace{2ex}
+ \textbf{Chapters by N. Other Author}\par}
+
+ The difference between '\addtocontents' and '\addcontentsline' is
+that the latter is strictly for lines, such as with a line giving the
+page number for the start of a new subset of the chapters. As the above
+examples show, '\addtocontents' is for material such as spacing.
+
The '\addtocontents' command has two arguments. Both are required.
EXT
@@ -12919,7 +14367,47 @@ as with '\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...}' then lines in the table
of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to move
'\addtocontents' into the file being included.
-25.1.3 '\nofiles'
+25.1.4 '\contentsline'
+----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \contentsline{UNIT}{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}
+
+ Used internally by LaTeX to typeset an entry of the table of
+contents, list of figures, or list of tables (*note Table of contents
+etc.::). Authors do not directly enter '\contentsline' commands.
+
+ Usually adding material to these lists is done automatically by the
+commands '\chapter', '\section', etc. for the table of contents, or by
+the '\caption' command inside of a '\figure' or '\table' environment
+(*note figure:: and *note table::). Thus, where the base file is
+'thesis.tex', and contains the declaration '\tableofcontents', the
+command '\chapter{Chapter One}' produces something like this in the file
+'thesis.toc'.
+
+ \contentsline {chapter}{\numberline {1}Chapter One}{3}
+
+ If the file contains the declaration '\listoffigures' then a figure
+environment involving '\caption{Test}' will produce something like this
+in 'thesis.lof'.
+
+ \contentsline {figure}{\numberline {1.1}{\ignorespaces Test}}{6}
+
+ To manually add material, use
+'\addcontentsline{FILETYPE}{UNIT}{TEXT}', where FILETYPE is 'toc',
+'lof', or 'lot' (*note \addcontentsline::).
+
+ For manipulating how the '\contentline' material is typeset, see the
+'tocloft' package.
+
+ Note that the 'hyperref' package changes the definition of
+'\contentsline' (and '\addcontentsline') to add more arguments, to make
+hyperlinks. This is the source of the error 'Argument of \contentsline
+has an extra }'. Fix this error by deleting the '.toc' or '.lof' or
+'.lot' file, and running LaTeX again.
+
+25.1.5 '\nofiles'
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -12944,6 +14432,35 @@ LaTeX will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert the
'\nofiles' command after you have run the file and gotten a '.toc' then
the table of contents page will continue to show the old information.
+25.1.6 '\numberline'
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \numberline{NUMBER}
+
+ Typeset its argument flush left in a box. This is used in a
+'\contentsline' command to typeset the section number (*note
+\contentsline::).
+
+ For example, this line in a '.toc' file causes the '1' to be typeset
+flush left.
+
+ \contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}Motivation}{2}
+
+ By default, LaTeX typesets the section numbers in a box of length
+'\@tempdima'. That length is set by the commands '\l@section',
+'\l@subsection', etc. Put section numbers inside a natural-width box
+with '\renewcommand{\numberline}[1]{#1~}'.
+
+ This command is fragile, so you may need to precede it with
+'\protect' (*note \protect::). An example is the use of '\protect' in
+the command
+'\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}Summary}' to get
+the '\numberline' into this command in the '.toc' file: '\contentsline
+{section}{\numberline {}Summary}{6}' (the page number '6' is
+automatically added by LaTeX; *note \addcontentsline::).
+
25.2 Indexes
============
@@ -12973,12 +14490,12 @@ manipulations you run an external command, typically 'makeindex' or
Finally, you bring the information back into your document and typeset
it with the '\printindex' command (*note \printindex::).
- There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The
-'showidx' package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on
-the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index.
-The 'multind' package supports multiple indexes. See also the TeX FAQ
-entry on this topic,
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind>.
+ There are many packages in the area of indexing. The 'showidx'
+package causes each index entries to be shown in the margin on the page
+where the entry appears. This can help in preparing the index. The
+'multind' package, among others, supports multiple indexes. See also
+the TeX FAQ entry on this topic, <https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-multind>,
+and the CTAN topic, <https://ctan.org/topic/index-multi>.
25.2.1 '\index'
---------------
@@ -13064,7 +14581,7 @@ which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing.
which outputs an index entry like 'function, 23--27' where the page
number range is in blue.
- Consider an index entry such as 'U+03B1-ring'. Entering it as
+ Consider an index entry such as 'α-ring'. Entering it as
'$\alpha$-ring' will cause it to be alphabetized according to the dollar
sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as
'\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}'. If you specify an entry with an
@@ -13153,8 +14670,8 @@ then it is a comment.
Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group
for entries starting with 'a', etc. This specifier gives what is
inserted when a new group begins. Default: '"\n\n \\indexspace\n"'
- ('\indexspace' is a rubber length with default value '10pt plus5pt
- minus3pt').
+ ('\indexspace' is a command inserting a rubber length, by default
+ '10pt plus5pt minus3pt').
'lethead_flag'
An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter.
@@ -13244,10 +14761,14 @@ then it is a comment.
'"rnaRA"'.
There are a number of other programs that do the job 'makeindex'
-does. One is 'xindy', which does internationalization and can process
-indexes for documents marked up using LaTeX and a number of other
-languages. It is highly configurable, both in markup terms and in terms
-of the collating order of the text, as described in its documentation.
+does. One is 'xindy' (https://ctan.org/pkg/xindy), which does
+internationalization and can process indexes for documents marked up
+using LaTeX and a number of other languages. It is written in Lisp,
+highly configurable, both in markup terms and in terms of the collating
+order of the text, as described in its documentation.
+
+ A more recent indexing program supporting Unicode is 'xindex',
+written in Lua (<https://ctan.org/pkg/xindex>).
25.2.3 '\printindex'
--------------------
@@ -13261,7 +14782,7 @@ Synopsis:
To get an index you must first include
'\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex' in the document preamble and compile
the document, then run the system command 'makeindex', and then compile
-the document again. *Note Indexes:: for further discussion and an
+the document again. *Note Indexes::, for further discussion and an
example of the use of '\printindex'.
25.3 Glossaries
@@ -13337,8 +14858,8 @@ Synopsis, one of:
document. The settings associated with the label are pairs:
'KEY=VALUE'.
- This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers U+211D in
-the glossary.
+ This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers ℝ, in the
+glossary.
\newglossaryentry{R}
{
@@ -13696,10 +15217,111 @@ where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
page.
-27 Terminal input/output
-************************
+27 Input/output
+***************
+
+LaTeX uses the ability to write to a file and later read it back in to
+build document components such as a table of contents or index. You can
+also read a file that other programs written, or write a file for others
+to read. You can communicate with users through the terminal. And, you
+can issue instructions for the operating system.
+
+27.1 '\openin' & '\openout'
+===========================
-27.1 '\typein'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \openin NUMBER=FILENAME
+
+ or:
+
+ \openout NUMBER=FILENAME
+
+ Open a file for reading material, or for writing it. The NUMBER must
+be between 0 and 15, as in '\openin3' (in LuaLaTeX NUMBER can be between
+0 and 255).
+
+ Here TeX opens the file 'presidents.tex' for reading.
+
+ \newread\presidentsfile
+ \openin\presidentsfile=presidents
+ \typeout{presidentsfile is \the\presidentsfile}
+ \read\presidentsfile to\presidentline
+ \typeout{\presidentline}
+
+The '\newread' command allocates input stream numbers from 0 to 15
+(there is also a '\newwrite'). The '\presidentsfile' is more memorable
+but under the hood it is still a number; the first '\typeout' gives
+something like 'presidentsfile is 1'. In addition, '\newread' keeps
+track of the allocation so that if you use too many then you get an
+error like '! No room for a new \read'. The second '\typeout' gives the
+first line of the file, something like '1 Washington, George'.
+
+ Ordinarily TeX will not try to open the file until the next page
+shipout. To change this, use '\immediate\openin NUMBER=FILENAME' or
+'\immediate\openout NUMBER=FILENAME'.
+
+ Close files with '\closein NUMBER' and '\closeout NUMBER'.
+
+ How LaTeX handles filenames varies among distributions, and even can
+vary among versions of a distribution. If the file does not have an
+extension then TeX will add a '.tex'. This creates 'presidents.tex',
+writes one line to it, and closes it.
+
+ \newwrite\presidentsfile
+ \openout\presidentsfile=presidents
+ \write\presidentsfile{1 Washington, George}
+ \closeout\presidentsfile
+
+But filenames with a period can cause trouble: if TeX finds a FILENAME
+of 'presidents.dat' it could look first for 'presidents.dat.tex' and
+later for 'presidents.dat', or it could do the opposite. Your
+distribution's documentation should say more, and if you find something
+that works for you then you are good, but to ensure complete portability
+the best thing is to use file names containing only the twenty six ASCII
+letters (not case-sensitive) and the ten digits, along with underscore
+and dash, and in particular with no dot or space.
+
+ For '\openin', if TeX cannot find the file then it does not give an
+error. It just considers that the stream is not open (test for this
+with '\ifeof'; one recourse is the command '\InputIfFileExists', *note
+Class and package commands::). If you try to use the same number twice,
+LaTeX won't give you an error. If you try to use a bad number then you
+get an error message like '! Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30
+\openin16=test.jh'.
+
+27.2 '\read'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \read NUMBER toMACRO
+
+ Make the command MACRO contain the next line of input from text
+stream NUMBER, as in '\read5 to\data'.
+
+ This opens the file 'email.tex' for reading, puts the contents of the
+first line into the command '\email', and then closes the file.
+
+ \newread\recipientfile
+ \openin\recipientfile=email
+ \read\recipientfile to\email
+ \typeout{Email address: \email}
+ \closein\recipientfile
+
+ If NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15 or if no file of that
+number is open, or if the file has ended, then '\read' will take input
+from the terminal (or exit if interaction is not allowed, e.g.,
+'\nonstopmode'; *note interaction modes::). (However, the natural way
+in LaTeX to take input from the terminal is '\typein' (*note \typein::.)
+
+ To read an entire file as additional LaTeX source, use '\input'
+(*note \input::) or '\include' (*note \include & \includeonly::).
+
+ A common reason to want to read from a data file is to do mail
+merges. CTAN has a number of packages for that; one is 'datatool'.
+
+27.3 '\typein'
==============
Synopsis, one of:
@@ -13728,8 +15350,8 @@ you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the input file
in place of the '\typein' command.
In the second command version the optional argument 'CMD' argument
-must be a command name -- it must begin with a backslash, \. This
-command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
+must be a command name, that is, it must begin with a backslash, \.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you
typed. For example, this
\typein[\student]{Enter student name:}
@@ -13744,7 +15366,7 @@ gives this output on the command line,
where the user has entered 'John Dee.'
-27.2 '\typeout'
+27.4 '\typeout'
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -13777,33 +15399,300 @@ spaces. Use '^^J' to get a newline. Get a percent character with
produces on the command line 'The length is 5.0pt'.
-28 Command line
-***************
+27.5 '\write'
+=============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \write NUMBER{STRING}
+
+ Write STRING to the log file, to the terminal, or to a file opened by
+'\openout'. For instance, '\write6' writes to text stream number 6.
+
+ If the following appears in 'BASEFILE.tex' then it opens
+'BASEFILE.jh', writes 'Hello World!' and a newline to it, and closes
+that file.
+
+ \newwrite\myfile
+ \immediate\openout\myfile=\jobname.jh % \jobname is root file basename
+ ...
+ \immediate\write\myfile{Hello world!}
+ ...
+ \immediate\closeout\myfile
+
+The '\newwrite' allocates a stream number, giving it a symbolic name to
+make life easier, so that 'stream \newwrite\myfile\the\myfile' produces
+something like 'stream 3'. Then '\openout' associates the stream number
+with the given file name. TeX ultimately executed '\write3' which puts
+the string in the file.
+
+ Typically NUMBER is between 0 and 15, because typically LaTeX authors
+follow the prior example and the number is allocated by the system. If
+NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15 or if it is not associated with
+an open file then LaTeX writes STRING to the log file. If NUMBER is
+positive then in addition LaTeX writes STRING to the terminal.
+
+ Thus, 'test \write-1{Hello World!}' puts 'Hello World!' followed by a
+newline in the log file. (This is what the '\wlog' command does; *note
+\wlog::). And '\write100{Hello World!}' puts the same in the log file
+but also puts 'Hello World!' followed by a newline in the terminal
+output. (But 16, 17, and 18 are special as NUMBER; see below.)
+
+ In LuaTeX, instead of 16 output streams there are 256 (*note TeX
+engines::).
+
+ Use '\write\@auxout{STRING}' to write to the current '.aux' file,
+which is associated with either the root file or with the current
+include file; and use '\write\@mainaux{STRING}' to write to the main
+'.aux'. These symbolic names are defined by LaTeX.
+
+ By default LaTeX does not write STRING to the file right away. This
+is because, for example, you may need '\write' to save the current page
+number, but when TeX comes across a '\write' it typically does not know
+what the page number is, since it has not yet done the page breaking.
+So, you use '\write' in one of three contexts:
+
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{STRING} %1
+ \write\@auxout{STRING} %2
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}{STRING} %3
+
+ 1. With the first, LaTeX writes STRING to the file immediately. Any
+ macros in STRING are fully expanded (just as in '\edef') so to
+ prevent expansion you must use '\noexpand', 'toks', etc., except
+ that you should use '#' instead of '##').
+
+ 2. With the second, STRING is stored on the current list of things (as
+ a TeX "whatsit" item) and kept until the page is shipped out and
+ likewise the macros are unexpanded until '\shipout'. At
+ '\shipout', STRING is fully expanded.
+
+ 3. The third, '\protected@write', is like the second except that you
+ can use '\protect' to avoid expansion. The extra first argument
+ allows you to locally insert extra definitions to make more macros
+ protected or to have some other special definition for the write.
+
+ As a simple example of expansion with '\write', STRING here contains
+a control sequence '\triplex' which we've defined to be the text 'XYZ':
+
+ \newwrite\jhfile
+ \openout\jhfile=test.jh
+ \newcommand{\triplex}{XYZ}
+ \write\jhfile{test \triplex test}
+
+This results in the file 'test.jh' containing the text 'test XYZtest'
+followed by a newline.
+
+ The cases where NUMBER is 16, 17, or 18 are special. Because of
+'\write''s behavior when NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15
+described above, in Plain TeX '\write16' and '\write17' were sometimes
+used to write to the log file and the terminal; however, in LaTeX, the
+natural way to do that is with '\typeout' (*note \typeout::). The
+'\write18' command is even more special; modern TeX systems use it for
+giving commands to the operating system (*note \write18::).
+
+ Ordinarily '\write' outputs a single line. You can include a newline
+with '^^J'. Thus, this produces two lines in the log file:
+
+ \wlog{Parallel lines have a lot in common.^^JBut they never meet.}
+
+ A common case where authors need to write their own file is for
+answers to exercises, or another situation where you want to write out
+verbatim, without expanding the macros. CTAN has a number of packages
+for this; one is 'answers'.
+
+27.5.1 '\write' and security
+----------------------------
+
+The ability to write files raises security issues. If you compiled a
+downloaded LaTeX file and it overwrote your password file then you would
+be justifiably troubled.
+
+ Thus, by default TeX systems only allow you to open files for writing
+that are in the current directory or output directory, if specified
+(*note output directory::), or in a subdirectory of those. So, this
+code
+
+ \newwrite\jhfile
+ \openout\jhfile=../test.jh
+
+gives an error like:
+ Not writing to ../test.jh (openout_any = p).
+ ! I can't write on file `../test.jh'
+
+ You can get just such an error when using commands such as
+'\include{../filename}' because LaTeX will try to open
+'../filename.aux'. The simplest solution is to put the included files
+in the same directory as the root file, or in subdirectories.
+
+27.5.2 '\message'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \message{STRING}
+
+ Write STRING to the log file and the terminal.
+
+ Typically, LaTeX authors use '\typeout' (*note \typeout::). It
+allows you to use '\protect' on any fragile commands in STRING (*note
+\protect::). But '\typeout' always inserts a newline at the end of
+STRING while '\message' does not, so the latter can be useful.
+
+ With this example document body.
+
+ before\message{One Two}\message{Three}\message{Four^^JI}
+ \message{declare a thumb war.}After
+
+under some circumstances (see below) LaTeX writes the following to both
+the terminal and the log file.
+
+ One Two Three Four
+ I declare a thumb war.
+
+The '^^J' produces a newline. Also, in the output document, between
+'before' and 'After' will be a single space (from the end of line
+following 'I}').
+
+ While '\message' allows you more control over formatting, a gotcha is
+that LaTeX may mess up that formatting because it inserts line breaks
+depending on what it has already written. Contrast this document body,
+where the 'Two' has moved, to the one given above.
+
+ before\message{One}\message{Two Three}\message{Four^^JI}
+ \message{declare a thumb war.}After
+
+ This can happen: when LaTeX is outputting the messages to the
+terminal, now the message with 'One' is shorter and it fits at the end
+of the output terminal line, and so LaTeX breaks the line between it and
+the 'Two Three'. That line break appears also in the log file. This
+line break insertion can depend on, for instance, the length of the full
+path names of included files. So producing finely-formatted lines in a
+way that is portable is hard, likely requiring starting your message at
+the beginning of a line.
+
+27.5.3 '\wlog'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \wlog{STRING}
+
+ Write STRING to the log file.
+
+ \wlog{Did you hear about the mathematician who hates negatives?}
+ \wlog{He'll stop at nothing to avoid them.}
+
+ Ordinarily STRING appears in a single separate line. Use '^^J' to
+insert a newline.
+
+ \wlog{Helvetica and Times Roman walk into a bar.}
+ \wlog{The barman says,^^JWe don't serve your type.}
+
+27.5.4 '\write18'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \write18{SHELL_COMMAND}
+
+ Issue a command to the operating system shell. The operating system
+runs the command and LaTeX's execution is blocked until that finishes.
+
+ This sequence (on Unix)
+
+ \usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble
+ ...
+ \newcommand{\fignum}{1}
+ \immediate\write18{cd pix && asy figure\fignum}
+ \includegraphics{pix\figure\fignum.pdf}
+
+will run Asymptote (the 'asy' program) on 'pix/figure1.asy', so that the
+document can later read in the resulting graphic (*note
+\includegraphics::). Like any '\write', here LaTeX expands macros in
+SHELL_COMMAND so that '\fignum' is replaced by '1'.
+
+ Another example is that you can automatically run BibTeX at the start
+of each LaTeX run (*note Using BibTeX::) by including
+'\immediate\write18{bibtex8 \jobname}' as the first line of the file.
+Note that '\jobname' expands to the basename of the root file unless the
+'--jobname' option is passed on the command line, in which case this is
+the option argument.
+
+ You sometimes need to do a multi-step process to get the information
+that you want. This will insert into the input a list of all PDF files
+in the current directory (but see 'texosquery' below):
+
+ \immediate\write18{ls *.pdf > tmp.dat}
+ \input{tmp.dat}
+
+ The standard behavior of any '\write' is to wait until a page is
+being shipped out before expanding the macros or writing to the stream
+(*note \write::). But sometimes you want it done now. For this, use
+'\immediate\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}'.
+
+ There are obvious security issues with allowing system commands
+inside a LaTeX file. If you download a file off the net and it contains
+commands to delete all your files then you would be unhappy. The
+standard settings in modern distributions turn off full shell access.
+You can turn it on, if you are sure the shell commands are safe, by
+compiling with 'latex --enable-write18 FILENAME' (*note Command line
+options::). (The '--shell-escape' option is a synonym, in TeX Live.)
+
+ In the place of full shell access, modern distributions by default
+use a restricted version that allows some commands to work, such as
+those that run Metafont to generate missing fonts, even if you do not
+use the 'enable-write18' option. By default this list of allowed
+commands is short and features only commands that are under the control
+of the distribution maintainers (*note Command line options::).
+
+ The SHELL_COMMAND text is always passed to '/bin/sh' on Unix-like
+operating systems, and the DOS command interpreter 'cmd.exe' on Windows.
+Any different shell set by the user, and the 'SHELL' environment
+variable, is ignored.
+
+ If what you need is system information, such as the operating system
+name, locale information, or directory contents, take a look at the
+'texosquery' package, which provides a convenient and secure interface
+for this, unlike the above examples using the raw '\write18':
+<https://ctan.org/pkg/texosquery>.
+
+ LaTeX provides a package 'shellesc' on top of the primitive
+'\write18' command. Its primary purpose is to provide a command
+'\ShellEscape' which works identically on all TeX engines; LuaTeX
+intentionally did not retain '\write18' as a way to invoke a shell
+command, so some engine-specific code is needed. The 'shellesc' package
+also provides a command '\DelayedShellEscape', executed at '\output'
+time, for the same reason.
+
+28 Command line interface
+*************************
Synopsis (from a terminal command line):
pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT
- Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT. In place of 'pdflatex' you can also use
-'xelatex', or 'lualatex', or 'dviluatex', or 'latex'.
+ Run LaTeX on ARGUMENT. In place of 'pdflatex' you can also use (for
+PDF output) 'xelatex' or 'lualatex', or (for DVI output) 'latex' or
+'dvilualatex', among others (*note TeX engines::).
For example, this will run LaTeX on the file 'thesis.tex', creating
the output 'thesis.pdf'.
pdflatex thesis
-Note that '.tex' is the default file extension.
+Note that '.tex' is the default file name extension.
- pdfTeX is a development of the original TeX program, as are XeTeX and
-LuaTeX (*note TeX engines::). They are completely backward compatible.
-But the original program had a custom output format, DVI, while the
-newer ones can output directly to PDF. This allows them to take
-advantage of the extra features in PDF such as hyperlinks, support for
-modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and ubiquitous viewing
-programs. In short, if you run 'pdflatex' or 'xelatex' or 'lualatex'
-then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its modern
-features. If you run 'latex', or 'dvilualatex', then you will get DVI.
-The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.
+ pdfTeX is an extension of the original TeX program, as are XeTeX and
+LuaTeX (*note TeX engines::). The first two are completely backward
+compatible and the latter, almost so. Perhaps the most fundamental new
+feature for all three is that the original TeX output its own DVI
+format, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This allows
+them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as hyperlinks,
+support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and ubiquitous
+viewing programs. In short, if you run 'pdflatex' or 'xelatex' or
+'lualatex' then you will by default get PDF and have access to all its
+modern features. If you run 'latex', or 'dvilualatex', then you will
+get DVI. The description here assumes pdfLaTeX.
*Note Command line options::, for a selection of the most useful
command line options. As to ARGUMENT, the usual case is that it does
@@ -13813,10 +15702,10 @@ then the system will interpret it as a line of LaTeX input, which can be
used for special effects (*note Command line input::).
If you gave no arguments or options then 'pdflatex' prompts for input
-from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering '<control>-D'.
+from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering 'CTRL-D'.
If LaTeX finds an error in your document then by default it stops and
-asks you about it. *Note Recovering from errors:: for an outline of
+asks you about it. *Note Recovering from errors::, for an outline of
what to do.
28.1 Command line options
@@ -13828,7 +15717,11 @@ line.
With many implementations you can specify command line options by
prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
-(and MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both conventions interchangeably.
+(including MacTeX) and MiKTeX. We will use both conventions
+interchangeably. If an option takes a value, it can be specified either
+as a separate argument ('--foo val'), or as one argument with an '='
+sign ('--foo=val'), but there can be no spaces around the '='. We will
+generally use the '=' syntax.
'-version'
Show the current version, like 'pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX
@@ -13841,13 +15734,13 @@ prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
'-interaction=MODE'
TeX compiles a document in one of four interaction modes:
'batchmode', 'nonstopmode', 'scrollmode', 'errorstopmode'. In
- "errorstop mode" (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks
- for user intervention. In "batch mode" it prints nothing on the
- terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit '<return>' at
- every error, and missing files cause the job to abort. In "nonstop
- mode", diagnostic message appear on the terminal but as in batch
- mode there is no user interaction. In "scroll mode", TeX only
- stops for missing files or keyboard input.
+ "errorstopmode" (the default), TeX stops at each error and asks for
+ user intervention. In "batchmode" it prints nothing on the
+ terminal, errors are scrolled as if the user hit 'RETURN' at every
+ error, and missing files cause the job to abort. In "nonstopmode",
+ diagnostic message appear on the terminal but as in batch mode
+ there is no user interaction. In "scrollmode", TeX stops for
+ missing files or keyboard input, but nothing else.
For instance, starting LaTeX with this command line
@@ -13856,43 +15749,40 @@ prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
eliminates most terminal output.
'-jobname=STRING'
- Set the value of TeX's 'jobname' to the string. The log file and
+ Set the value of TeX's "jobname" to the string. The log file and
output file will then be named 'STRING.log' and 'STRING.pdf'.
-
- When you run 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT', if ARGUMENT does not
- start with a backslash then TeX considers it the name of a file to
- input. Otherwise it waits for the first '\input' instruction and
- the name of the input file will be the job name. This is used to
- name the log file the output file. The 'jobname' option overrides
- that process and directly specifies the name. *Note Command line
- input:: for an example of its use.
+ *note Jobname::.
'-output-directory=DIRECTORY'
Write files in the directory DIRECTORY. It must already exist.
+ This applies to all external files created by TeX or LaTeX, such as
+ the '.log' file for the run, the '.aux', '.toc', etc., files
+ created by LaTeX, as well as the main '.pdf' or '.dvi' output file
+ itself.
+
+ When specified, the output directory DIRECTORY is also
+ automatically checked first for any file that it is input, so that
+ the external files can be read back in, if desired. The true
+ current directory (in which LaTeX was run) remains unchanged, and
+ is also checked for input files.
-'--shell-escape'
-'--no-shell-escape'
'--enable-write18'
'--disable-write18'
- Enable or disable '\write18{SHELL COMMAND}'. The first two options
- are for with TeX Live or MacTeX while the second two are for
- MiKTeX.
-
- Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a
- LaTeX file. For instance the package 'sagetex' allows you to have
- the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw graphs
- and then incorporate that output in your document. For this TeX
- provides the '\write18' command.
-
- But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen
- if you compiled a LaTeX file from the Internet. By default
- '\write18' is disabled. (More precisely, by default TeX Live,
- MacTeX, and MiKTeX only allow the execution of a limited number of
- TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)
-
- If you invoke LaTeX with the option 'no-shell-escape', and in your
- document you call '\write18{ls -l}', then you do not get an error
- but the log file says 'runsystem(ls -l)...disabled'.
+'--shell-escape'
+'--no-shell-escape'
+ Enable or disable '\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}' (*note \write18::).
+ The first two options are supported by both TeX Live and MiKTeX,
+ while the second two are synonyms supported by TeX Live.
+
+ Enabling this functionality has major security implications, since
+ it allows a LaTeX file to run any command whatsoever. Thus, by
+ default, unrestricted '\write18' is not allowed. (The default for
+ TeX Live, MacTeX, and MiKTeX is to allow the execution of a limited
+ number of TeX-related programs, which they distribute.)
+
+ For example, if you invoke LaTeX with the option 'no-shell-escape',
+ and in your document you call '\write18{ls -l}', then you do not
+ get an error but the log file says 'runsystem(ls -l)...disabled'.
'-halt-on-error'
Stop processing at the first error.
@@ -13905,13 +15795,17 @@ prefixing them with '-' or '--'. This is the case for both TeX Live
28.2 Command line input
=======================
-As part of the command line invocation 'pdflatex OPTIONS ARGUMENT' you
-can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting ARGUMENT with a backslash.
-This allows you to do some special effects.
+As part of the command line invocation
+
+ LATEX-ENGINE OPTIONS ARGUMENT
+
+you can specify arbitrary LaTeX input by starting ARGUMENT with a
+backslash. (All the engines support this.) This allows you to do some
+special effects.
For example, this file (which uses the 'hyperref' package for
-hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a
-PDF.
+hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one to be read on physical
+paper and one to be read online.
\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble
\newcommand{\urlcolor}{black}
@@ -13924,10 +15818,14 @@ PDF.
...
Compiling this document 'book.tex' with the command line 'pdflatex book'
-will give the 'CTAN' link in blue. But compiling it with 'pdflatex
-"\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"' has the link in black. (Note the
-use of double quotes to prevent interpretation of the symbols by the
-command line shell; your system may do this differently.)
+will give the 'CTAN' link in blue. But compiling it with
+
+ pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input book.tex"
+
+has the link in black. We use double quotes to prevent interpretation
+of the symbols by the command line shell. (This usually works on both
+Unix and Windows systems, but there are many peculiarities to shell
+quoting, so read your system documentation if need be.)
In a similar way, from the single file 'main.tex' you can compile two
different versions.
@@ -13936,19 +15834,82 @@ different versions.
pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
The 'jobname' option is there because otherwise both files would be
-called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first.
+called 'main.pdf' and the second would overwrite the first. (See the
+next section.)
- A final example. This loads the package 'graphicx' with the option
-'draft'
+ In this example, we pass the 'draft' option to the 'graphicx'
+package:
+
+ pdflatex "\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+
+so the graphic files are read for their bounding box size information
+but replaced in the PDF by a box with same size and that contains only
+the file name, which speeds up compilation time and saves printer ink.
+
+28.3 Jobname
+============
- pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}"
+Running LaTeX creates a number of files, including the main PDF (or DVI)
+output but also including others. These files are named with the
+so-called "jobname". The most common case is also the simplest, where
+for instance the command 'pdflatex thesis' creates 'thesis.pdf' and also
+'thesis.log' and 'thesis.aux'. Here the job name is 'thesis'.
+
+ In general, LaTeX is invoked as 'LATEX-ENGINE OPTIONS ARGUMENT',
+where LATEX-ENGINE is 'pdflatex', 'lualatex', etc. (*note TeX
+engines::). If ARGUMENT does not start with a backslash, as is the case
+above with 'thesis', then TeX considers it to be the name of the file to
+input as the main document. The name of that root file, without the
+'.tex' extension, is the jobname. If ARGUMENT does start with a
+backslash, or if TeX is in interactive mode, then it waits for the first
+'\input' command, and the jobname is the argument to '\input'.
+
+ There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly
+specified with the '-jobname' option, as in 'pdflatex -jobname=myname'
+(*note Command line input:: for a real example).
+
+ The final possibility is 'texput', which is the final fallback
+default if no other name is available to TeX. For example, if no
+'-jobname' option was specified, and the compilation stops before there
+is any output, then the log file will be named 'texput.log'.
+
+ A special case of this is that in LaTeX versions of (approximately)
+2020 or later, the jobname is also 'texput' if the first '\input' occurs
+as a result of being called by either '\documentclass' or
+'\RequirePackage'. So this will produce a file named 'texput.pdf':
+
+ pdflatex "\documentclass{minimal}\begin{document}Hello!\end{document}"
+
+ However, this special case only applies to those two commands. Thus,
+with
+
+ pdflatex "\documentclass{article}\usepackage{lipsum}\input{thesis}"
+
+the output file is 'lipsum.pdf', as '\usepackage' calls '\input'.
+
+ Within the document, the macro '\jobname' expands to the jobname.
+(When you run LaTeX on a file whose name contains spaces, the string
+returned by '\jobname' contains matching start and end quotes.) In the
+expansion of that macro, all characters are of catcode 12 (other) except
+that spaces are category 10, including letters that are normally
+catcode 11.
+
+ Because of this catcode situation, using the jobname in a conditional
+can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro '\IfBeginWith'
+from the 'xstring' package in its star variant, which is insensitive to
+catcode. For example, in the following text the footnote "Including
+Respublica Bananensis Francorum." is only present if the task name
+starts with 'my-doc'.
+
+ If a democracy is just a regime where citizens vote then
+ all banana republics \IfBeginWith*{\jobname}{my-doc}%
+ {\footnote{Including Respublica Bananensis Francorum.}}{} are
+ democracies.
-so the graphic files are read for their size information but not
-incorporated into the PDF. (The 'jobname' option is there because
-otherwise the output file would be 'graphicx.pdf', as '\RequirePackage'
-does an '\input' of its own.)
+ Manipulating the value of '\jobname' inside of a document does not
+change the name of the output file or the log file.
-28.3 Recovering from errors
+28.4 Recovering from errors
===========================
If LaTeX finds an error in your document then it gives you an error
@@ -13965,15 +15926,16 @@ causes it show this, and wait for input.
{} problem is a million dollar one.
?
-The simplest thing is to enter 'x' and '<return>' and fix the typo. You
-could instead enter '?' and '<return>' to see other options.
+The simplest thing is to enter 'x' and 'RETURN' and fix the typo. You
+could instead enter '?' and 'RETURN' to see other options.
There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to
include the '\end{document}' or misspelled it. In this case LaTeX gives
you a '*' prompt. You can get back to the command line by typing
-'\stop' and '<return>'.
+'\stop' and 'RETURN'; this command does its best to exit LaTeX
+immediately, whatever state it may be in.
- The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance,
+ The last scenario is that you mistyped the filename. For instance,
instead of 'pdflatex test' you might type 'pdflatex tste'.
! I can't find file `tste'.
@@ -13982,15 +15944,15 @@ instead of 'pdflatex test' you might type 'pdflatex tste'.
(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit)
Please type another input file name:
-The simplest thing is to enter '<Control>' and 'd' (holding them down at
-the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
+The simplest thing is to enter 'CTRL d' (holding the Control and d keys
+down at the same time), and then retype the correct command line.
Appendix A Document templates
*****************************
-Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
-be useful. Additional template resources are listed at
-<http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates>.
+Although illustrative material, perhaps these document templates will be
+useful. Additional template resources are listed at
+<https://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates>.
A.1 'beamer' template
=====================
@@ -14002,7 +15964,7 @@ features, but here is a basic template:
\title{Beamer Class template}
\author{Alex Author}
-\date{July 31, 2007}
+\date{July 31, 2020}
\begin{document}
@@ -14020,12 +15982,13 @@ features, but here is a basic template:
\end{document}
- One web resource for this:
-<http://robjhyndman.com/hyndsight/beamer/>.
+ The Beamer package on CTAN: <https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer>.
A.2 'article' template
======================
+A simple template for an article.
+
\documentclass{article}
\title{Article Class Template}
\author{Alex Author}
@@ -14041,13 +16004,14 @@ Additional text.
\section{Second section}
Some more text.
+
\end{document}
A.3 'book' template
===================
-This is a straightforward template for a book. See *Note Larger book
-template:: for a more elaborate one.
+This is a straightforward template for a book. *Note Larger book
+template::, for a more elaborate one.
\documentclass{book}
\title{Book Class Template}
@@ -14064,23 +16028,27 @@ Some other text.
\section{A subtopic}
The end.
+
\end{document}
A.4 Larger 'book' template
==========================
-This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has '\frontmatter',
-'\mainmatter', and '\backmatter' to control the typography of the three
-main areas of a book (*note \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter::).
-The book has a bibliography and an index.
+This is a somewhat elaborate template for a book. *Note book
+template::, for a simpler one.
- Notable is that it uses '\include' and '\includeonly' (*note
+ This template uses '\frontmatter', '\mainmatter', and '\backmatter'
+to control the typography of the three main areas of a book (*note
+\frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter::). The book has a
+bibliography and an index.
+
+ Also notable is that it uses '\include' and '\includeonly' (*note
Splitting the input::). While you are working on a chapter you can
comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
'\includeonly'. That will speed up compilation without losing any
information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
come on a new page is brought in with '\input' instead of '\include'.
-You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
+You don't get the cross-reference benefit with '\input'.)
\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
@@ -14089,11 +16057,12 @@ You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
\author{Alex Author}
\includeonly{%
- frontcover,
+% frontcover,
preface,
chap1,
- ...
+% appenA,
}
+
\begin{document}
\frontmatter
\include{frontcover}
@@ -14101,105 +16070,22 @@ You don't get the cross-reference benefit this way.)
\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright}
\tableofcontents
\include{preface}
+
\mainmatter
\include{chap1}
...
\appendix
-\include{appena}
+\include{appenA}
...
+
\backmatter
\bibliographystyle{apalike}
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
\bibliography
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
\printindex
-\include{backcover}
-\end{document}
-
-A.5 'tugboat' template
-======================
-
-'TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
-<http://tug.org/TUGboat>.
-
-\documentclass{ltugboat}
-
-\usepackage{graphicx}
-\usepackage{ifpdf}
-\ifpdf
-\usepackage[breaklinks,hidelinks]{hyperref}
-\else
-\usepackage{url}
-\fi
-%%% Start of metadata %%%
-
-\title{Example \TUB\ article}
-
-% repeat info for each author.
-\author{First Last}
-\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
-\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
-\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
-
-%%% End of metadata %%%
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
-This is an example article for \TUB{}.
-Please write an abstract.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-This is an example article for \TUB, linked from
-\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
-
-We recommend the \texttt{graphicx} package for image inclusions, and the
-\texttt{hyperref} package if active urls are desired (in the \acro{PDF}
-output). Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-
-The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations (and many more):
-% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
-\begin{verbatim}[\small]
-\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
-\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
-\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
-\mf \MFB
-\plain \POBox \PS
-\SGML \TANGLE \TB \TP
-\TUB \TUG \tug
-\UNIX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
-
-\, \bull \Dash \dash \hyph
-
-\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
-\cs{fred} -> \fred
-\meta{fred} -> <fred>
-\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
-\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
-\booktitle{Book of Fred}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-For references to other \TUB\ issue, please use the format
-\textsl{volno:issno}, e.g., ``\TUB\ 32:1'' for our \nth{100} issue.
-
-This file is just a template. The \TUB\ style documentation is the
-\texttt{ltubguid} document at \url{http://ctan.org/pkg/tugboat}. (For
-\CTAN\ references, where sensible we recommend that form of url, using
-\texttt{/pkg/}; or, if you need to refer to a specific file location,
-\texttt{http://mirror.ctan.org/\textsl{path}}.)
-
-Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
-
-\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
-\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
-\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
-
-\makesignature
+\include{backcover}
\end{document}
Index
@@ -14207,2585 +16093,2934 @@ Index
* Menu:
-* &: tabular. (line 4940)
+* $ inline math: math. (line 4674)
+* $$...$$ plain TeX display math: displaymath. (line 3779)
+* & for table cells: tabular. (line 5641)
* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
- (line 14060)
+ (line 16032)
* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 6771)
-* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 1981)
+ (line 7497)
+* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 2569)
* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6413)
+ (line 7127)
* --disable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13962)
+ (line 15867)
* --enable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13962)
+ (line 15867)
* --file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13989)
+ (line 15888)
* --halt-on-error command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13986)
+ (line 15885)
* --help command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13927)
+ (line 15829)
* --interaction command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13930)
+ (line 15832)
* --jobname command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13947)
+ (line 15849)
* --no-file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13989)
+ (line 15888)
* --no-shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13962)
+ (line 15867)
* --output-directory command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13959)
+ (line 15854)
* --shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13962)
+ (line 15867)
* --version command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 13922)
-* .aux file: Output files. (line 458)
-* .dvi file: Output files. (line 435)
-* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 13394)
-* .idx file: Indexes. (line 13035)
-* .idx file <1>: makeindex. (line 13186)
-* .ind file: makeindex. (line 13186)
-* .isty file: makeindex. (line 13198)
-* .lof file: Output files. (line 468)
+ (line 15824)
+* -1, write stream number: \write. (line 15526)
+* .aux file: Output files. (line 486)
+* .dvi file: Output files. (line 463)
+* .fmt file: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 14923)
+* .idx file: Indexes. (line 14560)
+* .idx file <1>: makeindex. (line 14711)
+* .ind file: makeindex. (line 14711)
+* .isty file: makeindex. (line 14723)
+* .lof file: Output files. (line 496)
* .lof file <1>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
-* .log file: Output files. (line 453)
-* .lot file: Output files. (line 468)
+ (line 14171)
+* .lof file <2>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* .log file: Output files. (line 481)
+* .lot file: Output files. (line 496)
* .lot file <1>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
-* .pdf file: Output files. (line 445)
-* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 13884)
-* .toc file: Output files. (line 468)
+ (line 14171)
+* .lot file <2>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* .pdf file: Output files. (line 473)
+* .tex, default extension: Command line interface.
+ (line 15781)
+* .toc file: Output files. (line 496)
* .toc file <1>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
-* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 510)
+ (line 14171)
+* .toc file <2>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 541)
+* /bin/sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 15746)
* 10pt option: Document class options.
- (line 672)
+ (line 737)
* 11pt option: Document class options.
- (line 672)
+ (line 737)
* 12pt option: Document class options.
- (line 672)
-* :: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9486)
-* : <1>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9486)
+ (line 737)
+* : for math: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 10730)
* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 529)
+ (line 591)
+* \ (backslash-space): \(SPACE). (line 11412)
* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 529)
+ (line 591)
* \!: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9351)
-* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 12378)
+ (line 10561)
+* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 13648)
* \#: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
+ (line 13325)
* \$: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
+ (line 13325)
* \%: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
+ (line 13325)
* \&: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
-* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 12382)
-* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4786)
-* \*: \*. (line 9506)
-* \+: tabbing. (line 4778)
+ (line 13325)
+* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 13652)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5489)
+* \(...\) inline math: math. (line 4674)
+* \*: \*. (line 10750)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 5481)
* \,: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9337)
-* \-: tabbing. (line 4782)
-* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 5808)
-* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 12385)
-* \/: \/. (line 10324)
+ (line 10547)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 5485)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6520)
+* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 13655)
+* \/: \/. (line 11541)
* \:: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9333)
+ (line 10537)
* \;: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9328)
-* \<: tabbing. (line 4774)
-* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 12389)
-* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4768)
-* \>: tabbing. (line 4772)
+ (line 10526)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 5477)
+* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 13659)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5471)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 5475)
* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9333)
-* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4771)
-* \@: \@. (line 10127)
-* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 3868)
-* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 3876)
-* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 6164)
-* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 6598)
-* \@itempenalty: list. (line 3872)
-* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 2452)
-* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4801)
-* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 4802)
-* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 4802)
-* \aa (aa): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12455)
-* \AA (AA): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12455)
-* \acute: Math accents. (line 9221)
-* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 12895)
-* \address: \address. (line 13573)
-* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 12970)
-* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 7316)
-* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 7563)
-* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 10649)
-* \ae (ae): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12459)
-* \AE (AE): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12459)
-* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 8055)
-* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 3227)
-* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 8058)
+ (line 10537)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5474)
+* \@: \@. (line 11336)
+* \@auxout: \write. (line 15541)
+* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 4556)
+* \@dottedtocline: \@dottedtocline. (line 14296)
+* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 4564)
+* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 6876)
+* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 7310)
+* \@itempenalty: list. (line 4560)
+* \@mainaux: \write. (line 15541)
+* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 3055)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5504)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5505)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5505)
+* \aa (å): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13769)
+* \AA (Å): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13769)
+* \accent: \accent. (line 13719)
+* \acute: Math accents. (line 10419)
+* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 14332)
+* \address: \address. (line 15102)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 14408)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 8090)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 8336)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 11876)
+* \ae (æ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13773)
+* \AE (Æ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13773)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 8965)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 3890)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 8968)
* \alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7191)
+ (line 7965)
* \Alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7196)
-* \alsoname: \index. (line 13121)
-* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 8061)
-* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 9718)
-* \angle: Math symbols. (line 8064)
-* \appendix: \appendix. (line 2391)
-* \approx: Math symbols. (line 8069)
+ (line 7970)
+* \alsoname: \index. (line 14646)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 8971)
+* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 10927)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 8974)
+* \appendix: \appendix. (line 2986)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 8979)
* \arabic{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7201)
-* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9104)
-* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 9107)
-* \arctan: Math functions. (line 9110)
-* \arg: Math functions. (line 9113)
-* \arraycolsep: array. (line 2910)
-* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 5065)
-* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 5071)
-* \ast: Math symbols. (line 8072)
-* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 8081)
-* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3140)
+ (line 7975)
+* \arccos: Math functions. (line 10302)
+* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 10305)
+* \arctan: Math functions. (line 10308)
+* \arg: Math functions. (line 10311)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 3573)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 5766)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 5772)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 8982)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 8990)
+* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3803)
* \AtBeginDvi: Class and package commands.
- (line 852)
-* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3156)
+ (line 917)
+* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3819)
* \AtEndOfClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 857)
+ (line 922)
* \AtEndOfPackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 857)
-* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}: \maketitle. (line 9717)
-* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 4802)
-* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 12404)
+ (line 922)
+* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}: \maketitle. (line 10926)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5505)
+* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 13674)
* \backmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
-* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 8084)
-* \bar: Math accents. (line 9224)
+ (line 3019)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 8993)
+* \bar: Math accents. (line 10422)
* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1470)
-* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1480)
-* \begin: Environments. (line 2802)
-* \beta: Math symbols. (line 8088)
-* \bf: Font styles. (line 1268)
-* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 1233)
-* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 5292)
-* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
-* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
-* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 8091)
-* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 8095)
-* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 8099)
-* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 8103)
-* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 8106)
-* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 8109)
+ (line 1981)
+* \baselineskip <1>: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* \baselinestretch: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* \begin: Environments. (line 3465)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 8997)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 1770)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 1735)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 5995)
+* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6119)
+* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6119)
+* \bibname: thebibliography. (line 5978)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 9000)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 9005)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 9008)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 9013)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 9016)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 9019)
* \bigskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 10430)
+ (line 11657)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 10431)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 8120)
-* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 8112)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 8116)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 8123)
-* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 8127)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 8130)
-* \bmod: Math functions. (line 9116)
+ (line 11658)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 9028)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 9022)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 9025)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 9031)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 9035)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 9038)
+* \bmod: Math functions. (line 10314)
* \boldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9006)
+ (line 9875)
* \boldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9014)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 8133)
-* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 1894)
-* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1895)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 8138)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 8141)
-* \breve: Math accents. (line 9227)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 8146)
-* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 12414)
-* \cal: Font styles. (line 1271)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 8149)
-* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 12382)
-* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 12440)
-* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 12444)
-* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 12414)
-* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 12393)
-* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 12378)
-* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 12418)
-* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 12397)
-* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 12422)
-* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 12389)
-* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 12436)
-* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 12426)
-* \capitalring: Accents. (line 12430)
-* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 12436)
-* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 12401)
-* \caption: figure. (line 3353)
-* \caption <1>: table. (line 4892)
-* \cc: \cc. (line 13599)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 8154)
-* \cdots: Dots. (line 9057)
-* \centering: \centering. (line 2992)
-* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* \chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2089)
-* \check: Math accents. (line 9230)
+ (line 9883)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 9041)
+* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 2482)
+* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2483)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 9046)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 9049)
+* \breve: Math accents. (line 10425)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 9054)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 13684)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 1773)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 9057)
+* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 13652)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 13710)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 13714)
+* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 13684)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 13663)
+* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 13648)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 13688)
+* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 13667)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 13692)
+* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 13659)
+* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 13706)
+* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 13696)
+* \capitalring: Accents. (line 13700)
+* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 13706)
+* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 13671)
+* \caption: figure. (line 4016)
+* \caption <1>: table. (line 5593)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 15128)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 9062)
+* \cdots: Dots. (line 10213)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 3655)
+* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* \chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2684)
+* \check: Math accents. (line 10428)
* \CheckCommand: Class and package commands.
- (line 864)
+ (line 929)
* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
- (line 864)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 8157)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 8160)
-* \circle: \circle. (line 4439)
-* \cite: \cite. (line 5351)
+ (line 929)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 9065)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 9068)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 5143)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 6053)
* \ClassError: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \ClassInfo: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \ClassInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \ClassWarning: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \ClassWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \cleardoublepage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 5987)
+ (line 6699)
* \clearpage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 5987)
-* \cline: \cline. (line 5199)
-* \closing: \closing. (line 13615)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 8165)
+ (line 6699)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 5900)
+* \closein: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
+* \closeout: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 15144)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 9073)
* \colon: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9486)
-* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 1548)
+ (line 10730)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 2046)
* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
+ (line 2171)
* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1676)
-* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 1554)
+ (line 2174)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 2052)
* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1674)
+ (line 2172)
* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1676)
-* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 1561)
+ (line 2174)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 2059)
* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1675)
+ (line 2173)
* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1676)
-* \complement: Math symbols. (line 8168)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 8174)
-* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 12899)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 8177)
-* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 12177)
-* \cos: Math functions. (line 9119)
-* \cosh: Math functions. (line 9122)
-* \cot: Math functions. (line 9125)
-* \coth: Math functions. (line 9128)
-* \csc: Math functions. (line 9131)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 8180)
+ (line 2174)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 9076)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 9082)
+* \contentsline: Table of contents etc..
+ (line 14228)
+* \contentsline <1>: \addcontentsline. (line 14336)
+* \contentsline <2>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 9085)
+* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 13424)
+* \cos: Math functions. (line 10317)
+* \cosh: Math functions. (line 10320)
+* \cot: Math functions. (line 10323)
+* \coth: Math functions. (line 10326)
+* \csc: Math functions. (line 10329)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 9088)
* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
- (line 903)
-* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 12418)
-* \dag: Text symbols. (line 12181)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 8185)
-* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 4645)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 8188)
-* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 9725)
+ (line 968)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 13688)
+* \dag: Text symbols. (line 13428)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 9092)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 5348)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 9095)
+* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 10934)
* \day: \day & \month & \year.
- (line 7366)
-* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 1594)
-* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1600)
-* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1607)
-* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 1573)
-* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 1612)
-* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 12184)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 8192)
-* \ddot: Math accents. (line 9233)
-* \ddots: Dots. (line 9061)
+ (line 8139)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 2092)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 2098)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 2105)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 2071)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 2110)
+* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 13431)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 9100)
+* \ddot: Math accents. (line 10431)
+* \ddots: Dots. (line 10217)
+* \DeclareFontEncoding: \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ (line 1384)
* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
- (line 11508)
+ (line 12741)
* \DeclareGraphicsRule: \DeclareGraphicsRule.
- (line 11548)
+ (line 12783)
* \DeclareOption: Class and package commands.
- (line 909)
+ (line 974)
* \DeclareOption*: Class and package commands.
- (line 909)
+ (line 974)
* \DeclareRobustCommand: Class and package commands.
- (line 939)
+ (line 1004)
* \DeclareRobustCommand*: Class and package commands.
- (line 939)
-* \deg: Math functions. (line 9134)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 8195)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 8198)
-* \det: Math functions. (line 9137)
-* \dh (d): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12463)
-* \DH (D): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12463)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 8201)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 8205)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 8209)
-* \dim: Math functions. (line 9140)
-* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 7941)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 8212)
+ (line 1004)
+* \DeclareTextAccent: \DeclareTextAccent.
+ (line 1418)
+* \DeclareTextAccent <1>: \DeclareTextAccentDefault.
+ (line 1441)
+* \DeclareTextAccentDefault: \DeclareTextAccentDefault.
+ (line 1441)
+* \DeclareTextCommand: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
+ (line 1469)
+* \DeclareTextCommand <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
+ (line 1518)
+* \DeclareTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
+ (line 1469)
+* \DeclareTextCommandDefault <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
+ (line 1518)
+* \DeclareTextComposite: \DeclareTextComposite.
+ (line 1550)
+* \DeclareTextCompositeCommand: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand.
+ (line 1575)
+* \DeclareTextSymbol: \DeclareTextSymbol.
+ (line 1593)
+* \DeclareTextSymbol <1>: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
+ (line 1620)
+* \DeclareTextSymbolDefault: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
+ (line 1620)
+* \deg: Math functions. (line 10332)
+* \DelayedShellEscape: \write18. (line 15757)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 9103)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 9106)
+* \det: Math functions. (line 10335)
+* \dh (ð): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13777)
+* \DH (Ð): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13777)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 9109)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 9113)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 9118)
+* \dim: Math functions. (line 10338)
+* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 8851)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 9121)
* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12469)
+ (line 13783)
* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12469)
-* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 630)
-* \dot: Math accents. (line 9236)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 8215)
+ (line 13783)
+* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 694)
+* \documentclass, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 15974)
+* \dot: Math accents. (line 10434)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 9124)
* \dotfill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
- (line 10359)
-* \dots: Text symbols. (line 12201)
-* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 5076)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 8219)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 8223)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 8227)
-* \emph: Font styles. (line 1253)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 8230)
-* \encl: \encl. (line 13628)
-* \end: Environments. (line 2802)
-* \endinput: \endinput. (line 12615)
-* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6061)
+ (line 11586)
+* \dots: Text symbols. (line 13448)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 5777)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 9129)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 9133)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 9137)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 1755)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 9140)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 15157)
+* \end: Environments. (line 3465)
+* \endinput: \endinput. (line 13982)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6773)
* \enspace: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
- (line 9932)
-* \enumi: enumerate. (line 3213)
-* \enumii: enumerate. (line 3213)
-* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 3213)
-* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 3213)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 8234)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 8240)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 8243)
+ (line 11141)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 3876)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 3876)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 3876)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 3876)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 9143)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 9150)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 9153)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 742)
+ (line 807)
* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1734)
+ (line 2232)
* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1735)
+ (line 2233)
* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1015)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 8246)
-* \exp: Math functions. (line 9143)
-* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 5016)
-* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10794)
+ (line 1080)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 9156)
+* \exp: Math functions. (line 10341)
+* \externaldocument: xr package. (line 3410)
+* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 5717)
+* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12023)
* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture).
- (line 4622)
-* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10827)
-* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10826)
+ (line 5325)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12056)
+* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12055)
* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture).
- (line 4622)
-* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10832)
-* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10831)
-* \fill: \hfill. (line 10019)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 8249)
-* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 1898)
-* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 1899)
-* \floatsep: Floats. (line 1914)
-* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 1915)
-* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 1641)
-* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 6164)
+ (line 5325)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12061)
+* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12060)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 11228)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 9159)
+* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 2486)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 2487)
+* \floatsep: Floats. (line 2502)
+* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 2503)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 2139)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 6876)
* \fnsymbol{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7214)
+ (line 7988)
+* \fontdimen1: \/. (line 11575)
* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1380)
+ (line 1891)
* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1390)
+ (line 1901)
* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1417)
+ (line 1928)
* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1457)
+ (line 1968)
* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1470)
-* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6146)
-* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6212)
-* \footnoterule: \footnote. (line 6174)
-* \footnotesep: \footnote. (line 6186)
-* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6268)
+ (line 1981)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6858)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6924)
+* \footnoterule: \footnote. (line 6886)
+* \footnotesep: \footnote. (line 6898)
+* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6980)
* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1693)
+ (line 2191)
* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1694)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 8252)
-* \frac: \frac. (line 9522)
-* \frame: \frame. (line 4633)
+ (line 2192)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 9162)
+* \frac: \frac. (line 10766)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 5336)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture).
- (line 4597)
-* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10794)
-* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 10173)
+ (line 5300)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12023)
+* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 11382)
* \frontmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 8255)
-* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 5866)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 8258)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 8261)
-* \gcd: Math functions. (line 9146)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 8264)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 8268)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 8272)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 8275)
-* \gls: \gls. (line 13464)
-* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 11446)
-* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 4343)
-* \grave: Math accents. (line 9239)
-* \guillemotleft (<<): Text symbols. (line 12193)
-* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 12194)
-* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 12195)
-* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 12196)
-* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 12422)
-* \hat: Math accents. (line 9242)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 8279)
+ (line 3019)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 9165)
+* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6578)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 9168)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 9171)
+* \gcd: Math functions. (line 10344)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 9174)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 9178)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 9182)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 9185)
+* \gls: \gls. (line 14993)
+* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 12678)
+* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 5046)
+* \grave: Math accents. (line 10437)
+* \guillemotleft («): Text symbols. (line 13440)
+* \guillemotright (»): Text symbols. (line 13441)
+* \guilsinglleft (‹): Text symbols. (line 13442)
+* \guilsinglright (›): Text symbols. (line 13443)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 13692)
+* \hat: Math accents. (line 10440)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 9188)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1681)
+ (line 2179)
* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1682)
+ (line 2180)
* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1686)
+ (line 2184)
* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1687)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 8282)
-* \hfill: \hfill. (line 10007)
-* \hline: \hline. (line 5222)
-* \hom: Math functions. (line 9149)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8285)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8288)
+ (line 2185)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 9191)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 11216)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 5923)
+* \hom: Math functions. (line 10347)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9194)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9197)
* \hrulefill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
- (line 10359)
+ (line 11586)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1786)
+ (line 2284)
* \hsize <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1786)
-* \hspace: \hspace. (line 9960)
-* \hss: \hss. (line 10040)
-* \huge: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 5907)
-* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 12372)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 8291)
+ (line 2285)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 11169)
+* \hss: \hss. (line 11249)
+* \huge: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6619)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 13642)
+* \IfBeginWith* macro from xstring: Jobname. (line 15997)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 9200)
* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
- (line 971)
+ (line 1036)
* \ignorespaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7080)
+ (line 7806)
* \ignorespacesafterend: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7080)
+ (line 7806)
* \ij (ij): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12475)
+ (line 13789)
* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12475)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 8295)
-* \imath: Math symbols. (line 8298)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 8302)
+ (line 13789)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 9204)
+* \imath: Math symbols. (line 9207)
+* \immediate\write: \write. (line 15556)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 9211)
* \include: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 12646)
-* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+ (line 14014)
+* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
* \includeonly: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 12646)
+ (line 14014)
* \indent: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 7761)
-* \index: Indexes. (line 13035)
-* \index <1>: \index. (line 13071)
-* \indexentry: \index. (line 13171)
-* \indexspace: makeindex. (line 13238)
-* \inf: Math functions. (line 9152)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 8307)
-* \input: \input. (line 12763)
+ (line 8665)
+* \index: Indexes. (line 14560)
+* \index <1>: \index. (line 14596)
+* \indexentry: \index. (line 14696)
+* \indexspace: makeindex. (line 14763)
+* \inf: Math functions. (line 10350)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 9215)
+* \input: \input. (line 14133)
* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
- (line 971)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 8310)
-* \intextsep: Floats. (line 1918)
-* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 1919)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 8313)
-* \it: Font styles. (line 1274)
-* \item: description. (line 3059)
-* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 3195)
-* \item <2>: itemize. (line 3528)
-* \item <3>: itemize. (line 3550)
-* \itemindent: list. (line 3693)
-* \itemsep: list. (line 3697)
-* \itshape: Font styles. (line 1227)
-* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 12372)
-* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 8320)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 8316)
-* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 12426)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 8324)
-* \ker: Math functions. (line 9155)
-* \kill: tabbing. (line 4806)
-* \l (/l): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12479)
-* \L (/L): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12479)
-* \label: \label. (line 2691)
-* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 3222)
-* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 3222)
-* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 3222)
-* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 3222)
-* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 3557)
-* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 3557)
-* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 3557)
-* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 3557)
-* \labelsep: list. (line 3709)
-* \labelwidth: list. (line 3714)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 8327)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 8330)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 8333)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 8338)
-* \large: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \Large: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 12187)
-* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 12190)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 8343)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 8347)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 8351)
-* \ldots: Dots. (line 9065)
-* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 12200)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 8355)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 8359)
-* \left: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8366)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8371)
-* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 3279)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 8375)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 8378)
-* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 3734)
-* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 3576)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8381)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8386)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 8391)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 8395)
-* \lg: Math functions. (line 9158)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 8398)
-* \lim: Math functions. (line 9161)
-* \liminf: Math functions. (line 9164)
-* \limsup: Math functions. (line 9167)
-* \line: \line. (line 4367)
+ (line 1036)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 9218)
+* \intextsep: Floats. (line 2506)
+* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 2507)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 9221)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 1776)
+* \item: description. (line 3722)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 3858)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 4210)
+* \item <3>: itemize. (line 4234)
+* \itemindent: list. (line 4381)
+* \itemsep: list. (line 4385)
+* \itshape: Font styles. (line 1729)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 13642)
+* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 9227)
+* \jobname: Jobname. (line 15950)
+* \jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 15988)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 9224)
+* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 13696)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 9231)
+* \ker: Math functions. (line 10353)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 5509)
+* \l (ł): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13793)
+* \L (Ł): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13793)
+* \l@chapter: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* \l@section: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* \l@subsection: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* \label: \label. (line 3299)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 3885)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 3885)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 3885)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 3885)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 4246)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 4246)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 4246)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 4246)
+* \labelsep: list. (line 4397)
+* \labelwidth: list. (line 4402)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 9234)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 9237)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 9240)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 9244)
+* \large: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \Large: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \LastDeclaredEncoding: \LastDeclaredEncoding.
+ (line 1646)
+* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 13434)
+* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 13437)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 9248)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 9251)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 9254)
+* \ldots: Dots. (line 10220)
+* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 13447)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 9259)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 9262)
+* \left: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9268)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9273)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 3942)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 9277)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 9280)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 4422)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 4262)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9283)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9288)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 9293)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 9296)
+* \lg: Math functions. (line 10356)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 9299)
+* \lim: Math functions. (line 10359)
+* \liminf: Math functions. (line 10362)
+* \limsup: Math functions. (line 10365)
+* \line: \line. (line 5070)
* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 5925)
+ (line 6637)
+* \lineskip: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2343)
+* \lineskiplimit: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2343)
* \linespread: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1494)
-* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 4411)
+ (line 1992)
+* \linespread <1>: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 5115)
* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1700)
+ (line 2198)
* \linewidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1701)
+ (line 2199)
* \listoffigures: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
+ (line 14171)
+* \listoffigures <1>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
* \listoftables: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
-* \listparindent: list. (line 3751)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 8406)
-* \ln: Math functions. (line 9170)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 8410)
+ (line 14171)
+* \listoftables <1>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* \listparindent: list. (line 4439)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 9305)
+* \ln: Math functions. (line 10368)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 9308)
* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 991)
+ (line 1056)
* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 991)
-* \location: \location. (line 13643)
-* \log: Math functions. (line 9173)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 8413)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8418)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 8422)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8427)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 8432)
-* \lq: Text symbols. (line 12206)
+ (line 1056)
+* \location: \location. (line 15172)
+* \log: Math functions. (line 10371)
+* \long: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 7127)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9311)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9316)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 9321)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9326)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 9331)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 13453)
* \mainmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
-* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+ (line 3019)
+* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11932)
* \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture).
- (line 4559)
-* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 13357)
-* \makeglossary <1>: Glossaries. (line 13394)
-* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 13035)
-* \makelabel: list. (line 3670)
-* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 13653)
-* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 9681)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 8435)
-* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
+ (line 5262)
+* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 14886)
+* \makeglossary <1>: Glossaries. (line 14923)
+* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 14560)
+* \makelabel: list. (line 4358)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 15182)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 10890)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 9335)
+* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 8746)
* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1707)
+ (line 2205)
* \marginparpush <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1710)
-* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 7866)
-* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 7870)
+ (line 2208)
+* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 8775)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 8780)
* \marginparwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1709)
+ (line 2207)
* \marginparwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1710)
-* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 7874)
+ (line 2208)
+* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 8784)
* \marginsep: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1708)
+ (line 2206)
* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1710)
-* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 9879)
-* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 9888)
-* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 1304)
-* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 1320)
-* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 8944)
-* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 1317)
-* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 8947)
-* \mathring: Math accents. (line 9245)
-* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 1301)
-* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 8950)
-* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 1307)
-* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 8953)
-* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 1310)
-* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 8956)
-* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 1322)
-* \max: Math functions. (line 9176)
-* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
-* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 1230)
+ (line 2208)
+* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 11088)
+* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 11097)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 1806)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 1822)
+* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 9816)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 1819)
+* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 9819)
+* \mathring: Math accents. (line 10443)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 1803)
+* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 9822)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 1809)
+* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 9825)
+* \mathstrut: \mathstrut. (line 10702)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 1812)
+* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 9828)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 1824)
+* \max: Math functions. (line 10374)
+* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11932)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 1732)
* \medskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 10435)
+ (line 11662)
* \medskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 10436)
+ (line 11663)
* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9333)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 8439)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 8444)
-* \min: Math functions. (line 9179)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 8454)
+ (line 10537)
+* \message: \message. (line 15628)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 9340)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 9343)
+* \min: Math functions. (line 10377)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 9353)
* \month: \day & \month & \year.
- (line 7366)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 8459)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 8462)
-* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 5091)
-* \multiput: \multiput. (line 4295)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 8465)
-* \name: \name. (line 13710)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 8468)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 8471)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 8474)
+ (line 8139)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 9358)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 9361)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 5792)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 4983)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 9364)
+* \name: \name. (line 15239)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 9367)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 9370)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 9373)
* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
- (line 1025)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 8477)
+ (line 1090)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 9376)
+* \negmedspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 10542)
+* \negthickspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 10531)
* \negthinspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9351)
+ (line 10561)
* \negthinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 10300)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 8481)
+ (line 11513)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 9380)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6394)
-* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6659)
+ (line 7106)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 7385)
* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 6750)
-* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6996)
-* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 13405)
-* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6700)
-* \newline: \newline. (line 5784)
-* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE). (line 10203)
-* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6028)
-* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6722)
-* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
-* \newtie: Accents. (line 12436)
+ (line 7476)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 7722)
+* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 14934)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 7426)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 6496)
+* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE). (line 11412)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6740)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 7448)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 7610)
+* \newtie: Accents. (line 13706)
+* \newwrite: \write. (line 15520)
* \ng: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12483)
+ (line 13797)
* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12483)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 8484)
-* \nocite: \nocite. (line 5401)
-* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 1215)
-* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 1215)
-* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 13010)
+ (line 13797)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 9383)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6104)
+* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 1717)
+* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 1717)
+* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 14506)
* \noindent: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 7761)
+ (line 8665)
* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 5925)
-* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 10173)
-* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 3274)
+ (line 6637)
+* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 11382)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 3937)
* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6086)
-* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 1251)
-* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 7853)
-* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 10193)
-* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 8489)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 8497)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 8501)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 8504)
-* \o (/o): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12487)
-* \O (/O): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12487)
+ (line 6798)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 1753)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 8762)
+* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 11402)
+* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 9388)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 9396)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 9400)
+* \numberline: \numberline. (line 14531)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 9403)
+* \o (ø): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13801)
+* \O (Ø): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13801)
* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 5744)
+ (line 6456)
* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 742)
+ (line 807)
* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1733)
+ (line 2231)
* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1735)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 8507)
-* \oe (oe): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12491)
-* \OE (OE): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12491)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 8512)
-* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 1326)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 8516)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 8519)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 8522)
-* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 1522)
-* \opening: \opening. (line 13720)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 8525)
+ (line 2233)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 9406)
+* \oe (œ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13805)
+* \OE (Œ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13805)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 9410)
+* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 1828)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 9413)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 9416)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 9419)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 2020)
+* \openin: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 15249)
+* \openout: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 9422)
* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
- (line 1043)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 8529)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 8532)
-* \oval: \oval. (line 4458)
+ (line 1108)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 9427)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 9430)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 5162)
* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9300)
+ (line 10498)
* \overline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9281)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 8537)
-* \P: Text symbols. (line 12209)
+ (line 10479)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 9435)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 13456)
* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \PackageInfo: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \PackageInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \PackageWarning: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \PackageWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 884)
+ (line 949)
* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6086)
-* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 9752)
-* \pageref: \pageref. (line 2749)
-* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+ (line 6798)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 10961)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 3357)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 11019)
* \paperheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1746)
+ (line 2244)
* \paperheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1747)
+ (line 2245)
* \paperwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1752)
+ (line 2250)
* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1753)
-* \par: \par. (line 7708)
-* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+ (line 2251)
+* \par: \par. (line 8612)
+* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 2544)
* \paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2324)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 8542)
-* \parbox: \parbox. (line 10861)
-* \parindent: minipage. (line 4089)
+ (line 2919)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 9440)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 12090)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 4777)
* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 7761)
+ (line 8665)
* \parindent <2>: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 7810)
-* \parsep: list. (line 3757)
+ (line 8714)
+* \parsep: list. (line 4445)
* \parskip: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 7810)
-* \parskip example: itemize. (line 3595)
-* \part: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* \part <1>: \part. (line 2035)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 8545)
-* \partopsep: list. (line 3766)
+ (line 8714)
+* \parskip example: itemize. (line 4282)
+* \part: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* \part <1>: \part. (line 2630)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 9443)
+* \partopsep: list. (line 4454)
* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 1049)
+ (line 1114)
* \PassOptionsToPackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 1049)
+ (line 1114)
* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
- (line 698)
+ (line 763)
* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
- (line 698)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 8548)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 8553)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 8557)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 8560)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 8564)
-* \pmod: Math functions. (line 9182)
-* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 4812)
-* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 4813)
-* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 12213)
-* \Pr: Math functions. (line 9185)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 8567)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 8570)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 8575)
-* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 13357)
-* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 13394)
-* \printindex: \printindex. (line 13342)
-* \printindex <1>: \printindex. (line 13346)
+ (line 763)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 9446)
+* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 9450)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 9453)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 9458)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 9461)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 9465)
+* \pmod: Math functions. (line 10380)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 5515)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 5516)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 13460)
+* \Pr: Math functions. (line 10383)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 9468)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 9471)
+* \prevdepth: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2343)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 9475)
+* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 14886)
+* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 14923)
+* \printindex: \printindex. (line 14871)
+* \printindex <1>: \printindex. (line 14875)
* \ProcessOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1086)
+ (line 1151)
* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
- (line 1086)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 8584)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 8587)
-* \protect: \protect. (line 7028)
-* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+ (line 1151)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 9484)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 9487)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 7754)
+* \protected@write: \write. (line 15566)
+* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 7233)
* \ProvidesClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 1124)
+ (line 1189)
* \ProvidesFile: Class and package commands.
- (line 1157)
+ (line 1222)
* \ProvidesPackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 1124)
-* \ps: \ps. (line 13732)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 8590)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 8593)
-* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 4815)
-* \put: \put. (line 4277)
-* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 4318)
+ (line 1189)
+* \ProvideTextCommand: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
+ (line 1469)
+* \ProvideTextCommand <1>: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
+ (line 1518)
+* \ProvideTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
+ (line 1518)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 15261)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 9490)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 9493)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 5518)
+* \put: \put. (line 4965)
+* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 5006)
* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9362)
+ (line 10574)
* \qquad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
- (line 9932)
+ (line 11141)
* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9356)
+ (line 10568)
* \quad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
- (line 9932)
-* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 12217)
-* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 12218)
-* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 12430)
-* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 1662)
-* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
-* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 3452)
-* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 10913)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 8596)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 8601)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 8605)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 8609)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 8612)
-* \ref: \ref. (line 2773)
-* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 7332)
+ (line 11141)
+* \quotedblbase („): Text symbols. (line 13464)
+* \quotesinglbase (‚): Text symbols. (line 13465)
+* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 13700)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 2160)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 4183)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 4130)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 12142)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 9496)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 9501)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 9504)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 9508)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 9511)
+* \read: \read. (line 15393)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 3381)
+* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* \refname: thebibliography. (line 5978)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 8106)
* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 6750)
+ (line 7476)
* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 1166)
+ (line 1231)
+* \RequirePackage, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 15974)
* \RequirePackageWithOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1166)
-* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+ (line 1231)
+* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 13282)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 5744)
-* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 8617)
-* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 8622)
-* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 7853)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 8627)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 8631)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 8638)
-* \right: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8642)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 8647)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 8651)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 8654)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 8657)
-* \rightmargin: list. (line 3781)
-* \rm: Font styles. (line 1277)
-* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 1224)
+ (line 6456)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 9517)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 9522)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 8762)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 9527)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 9532)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 9538)
+* \right: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9543)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9548)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 9552)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 9555)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 9558)
+* \rightmargin: list. (line 4469)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 1779)
+* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 1726)
* \roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7204)
+ (line 7978)
* \Roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7209)
-* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
-* \rq: Text symbols. (line 12221)
-* \rule: \rule. (line 12506)
-* \S: Text symbols. (line 12224)
-* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 10959)
-* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 10959)
-* \sc: Font styles. (line 1280)
-* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \scshape: Font styles. (line 1245)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 8660)
-* \sec: Math functions. (line 9188)
-* \section: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* \section <1>: \section. (line 2182)
-* \seename: \index. (line 13121)
+ (line 7983)
+* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 13183)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 13468)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 13873)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 13471)
+* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12188)
+* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12188)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 1782)
+* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 1747)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 9561)
+* \sec: Math functions. (line 10386)
+* \section: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* \section <1>: \section. (line 2777)
+* \seename: \index. (line 14646)
* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1500)
-* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 7298)
-* \setlength: \setlength. (line 7535)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 8663)
-* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 7592)
-* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 7616)
-* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 7640)
-* \sf: Font styles. (line 1283)
-* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 1242)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 8669)
-* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 4494)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 8672)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 8675)
-* \signature: \signature. (line 13749)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 8679)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 8682)
-* \sin: Math functions. (line 9191)
-* \sinh: Math functions. (line 9194)
-* \sl: Font styles. (line 1286)
-* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 5866)
-* \slshape: Font styles. (line 1239)
-* \small: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 8685)
+ (line 1998)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 8072)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 8308)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 9564)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 8365)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 8389)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 8413)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 1785)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 1744)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 9570)
+* \ShellEscape: \write18. (line 15757)
+* \shipout and expansion: \write. (line 15561)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 5198)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 9573)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 9576)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 15278)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 9580)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 9583)
+* \sin: Math functions. (line 10389)
+* \sinh: Math functions. (line 10392)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 1788)
+* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6578)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 1741)
+* \small: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 9586)
* \smallskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 10440)
+ (line 11667)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 10441)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 8689)
-* \SPACE: \(SPACE). (line 10203)
-* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 10066)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 8692)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 8695)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 8699)
-* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 9569)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 8703)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 8708)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 8713)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 8718)
-* \ss (ss): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12495)
+ (line 11668)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 9590)
+* \SPACE: \(SPACE). (line 11412)
+* \SPACE <1>: \(SPACE). (line 11412)
+* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 11275)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 9593)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 9596)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 9600)
+* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 10778)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 9604)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 9609)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 9614)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 9619)
+* \ss (ß): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13809)
* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12495)
-* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 9585)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 8723)
-* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 7350)
+ (line 13809)
+* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 10794)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 9624)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 8124)
* \stop: Recovering from errors.
- (line 14060)
-* \strut: \strut. (line 10484)
-* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+ (line 16032)
+* \stretch: \stretch. (line 8437)
+* \strut: \strut. (line 11711)
+* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 2544)
* \subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2324)
-* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2260)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 8731)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 8734)
-* \subsubsection: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2324)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 8737)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 8741)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 8746)
-* \sup: Math functions. (line 9197)
-* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 1887)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 8750)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 8753)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 8756)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 8761)
+ (line 2919)
+* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2855)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 9632)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 9635)
+* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* \subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2919)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 9638)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 9641)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 9646)
+* \sup: Math functions. (line 10395)
+* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 2475)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 9649)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 9652)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 9655)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 9660)
* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
- (line 12160)
-* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 12436)
-* \TAB: \(SPACE). (line 10203)
-* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 4820)
-* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 5080)
+ (line 13405)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 13706)
+* \TAB: \(SPACE). (line 11412)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 5523)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 5781)
* \tableofcontents: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
-* \tan: Math functions. (line 9200)
-* \tanh: Math functions. (line 9203)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 8764)
-* \telephone: \telephone. (line 13779)
-* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 12228)
-* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 12266)
-* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 12231)
-* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 12234)
-* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 12237)
+ (line 14171)
+* \tableofcontents <1>: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* \tan: Math functions. (line 10398)
+* \tanh: Math functions. (line 10401)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 9663)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 15308)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 13475)
+* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 13513)
+* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 13478)
+* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 13481)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 13484)
* \textbackslash: Reserved characters.
- (line 12097)
-* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 12240)
-* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 12243)
-* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 12246)
-* \textbf: Font styles. (line 1233)
-* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 12249)
-* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 12252)
-* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 12255)
-* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 12258)
-* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 12265)
-* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 12261)
-* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 12264)
-* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 12178)
-* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 12273)
-* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 12276)
-* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 12279)
-* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 12202)
-* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 12282)
-* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 12287)
-* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 12290)
-* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 12296)
-* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 1923)
-* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 1924)
-* \textfraction: Floats. (line 1902)
-* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1903)
-* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 12299)
+ (line 13332)
+* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 13487)
+* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 13490)
+* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 13493)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 1735)
+* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 13496)
+* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 13499)
+* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 13502)
+* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 13505)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 13512)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 13508)
+* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 13511)
+* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 13425)
+* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 13520)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 13523)
+* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 13526)
+* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 13449)
+* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 13529)
+* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 13535)
+* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 13538)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 13546)
+* \textfiguredash: Text symbols. (line 13549)
+* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 2511)
+* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 2512)
+* \textfraction: Floats. (line 2490)
+* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2491)
+* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 13556)
* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1758)
+ (line 2256)
* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1759)
-* \textit: Font styles. (line 1227)
-* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 12305)
-* \textless: Text symbols. (line 12302)
-* \textmd: Font styles. (line 1230)
-* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 1251)
-* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 12308)
-* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 12309)
-* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 12210)
-* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 12312)
-* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 12315)
-* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 12318)
-* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 12321)
-* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 12324)
-* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 12327)
-* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 12330)
-* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 12333)
-* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 12334)
-* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 12337)
-* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 12340)
-* \textrm: Font styles. (line 1224)
-* \textsc: Font styles. (line 1245)
-* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 12225)
-* \textsf: Font styles. (line 1242)
-* \textsl: Font styles. (line 1239)
-* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 12214)
-* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 12343)
-* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 12346)
-* \texttt: Font styles. (line 1248)
-* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 12349)
-* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 12352)
-* \textup: Font styles. (line 1236)
-* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 12355)
+ (line 2257)
+* \texthorizontalbar: Text symbols. (line 13559)
+* \textit: Font styles. (line 1729)
+* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 13567)
+* \textless: Text symbols. (line 13564)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 1732)
+* \textnonbreakinghyphen: Text symbols. (line 13570)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 1753)
+* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 13576)
+* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 13577)
+* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 13457)
+* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 13580)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 13583)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 13586)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 13589)
+* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 13592)
+* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 13595)
+* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 13598)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 13601)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 13602)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 13605)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 13608)
+* \textrm: Font styles. (line 1726)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 1747)
+* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 13472)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 1744)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 1741)
+* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 13461)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 13611)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 13614)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 1750)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 13617)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 13620)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 1738)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 13623)
* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1766)
+ (line 2264)
* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1767)
-* \th (th): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12499)
-* \TH (TH): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12499)
-* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 9731)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 8767)
-* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 4431)
+ (line 2265)
+* \th (þ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13813)
+* \TH (Þ): Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 13813)
+* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 10940)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 9666)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 5135)
* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9328)
-* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 4423)
+ (line 10526)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 5127)
* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9337)
+ (line 10547)
* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 10300)
-* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 9894)
-* \tilde: Math accents. (line 9248)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 8771)
-* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 1345)
-* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 9738)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 8775)
-* \today: \today. (line 12541)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 8779)
-* \topfraction: Floats. (line 1907)
-* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 1908)
+ (line 11513)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 11103)
+* \tilde: Math accents. (line 10446)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 9670)
+* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 1845)
+* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 10947)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 9673)
+* \today: \today. (line 13908)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 9677)
+* \topfraction: Floats. (line 2495)
+* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2496)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1791)
-* \topsep: list. (line 3786)
+ (line 2289)
+* \topsep: list. (line 4474)
* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1798)
+ (line 2296)
* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1799)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 8784)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 8787)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 8793)
-* \tt: Font styles. (line 1289)
-* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 1248)
-* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 1534)
-* \typein: \typein. (line 13794)
-* \typeout: \typeout. (line 13839)
-* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 12440)
+ (line 2297)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 9682)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 9685)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 9691)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 1791)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 1750)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 2032)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 15424)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 15469)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 13710)
* \unboldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9006)
+ (line 9875)
* \unboldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9014)
-* \underbar: Accents. (line 12406)
+ (line 9883)
+* \underbar: Accents. (line 13676)
* \underbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9286)
+ (line 10484)
* \underline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9269)
-* \unitlength: picture. (line 4162)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 8799)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 8806)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 8813)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 8817)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 8821)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 8826)
-* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 8831)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 8836)
-* \upshape: Font styles. (line 1236)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 8843)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 8846)
-* \usebox: \usebox. (line 11065)
-* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 7239)
+ (line 10467)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 4860)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 9697)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 9703)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 9709)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 9713)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 9717)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 9722)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 9727)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 9732)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 1738)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 9739)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 9742)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 12296)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 8013)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1508)
+ (line 2006)
* \usepackage: Additional packages.
- (line 763)
-* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 12444)
-* \value: \value. (line 7265)
-* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 8854)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 8849)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 8859)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 8863)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 8867)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 8871)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 8875)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 8879)
-* \vdots: Dots. (line 9074)
-* \vec: Math accents. (line 9251)
-* \vector: \vector. (line 4536)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 8883)
-* \verb: \verb. (line 5582)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 8888)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 8904)
-* \vfill: \vfill. (line 10620)
-* \vline: \vline. (line 5173)
-* \vspace: \vspace. (line 10569)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 8922)
-* \widehat: Math accents. (line 9254)
-* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 9257)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 8926)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 8929)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 8932)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 8935)
+ (line 828)
+* \UseTextAccent: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent.
+ (line 1663)
+* \UseTextSymbol: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent.
+ (line 1663)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 13714)
+* \value: \value. (line 8039)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 9750)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 9745)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 9755)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 9759)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 9763)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 9767)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 9771)
+* \vbox plain TeX: minipage. (line 4731)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 9775)
+* \vdots: Dots. (line 10229)
+* \vec: Math accents. (line 10449)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 5240)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 9779)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 6290)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 9783)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 9787)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 11847)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 5874)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 11796)
+* \vtop plain TeX: minipage. (line 4727)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 9794)
+* \widehat: Math accents. (line 10452)
+* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 10455)
+* \wlog: \wlog. (line 15674)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 9798)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 9801)
+* \write: \write. (line 15502)
+* \write and security: \write and security.
+ (line 15604)
+* \write streams 16, 17, 18: \write. (line 15582)
+* \write18: \write18. (line 15692)
+* \write18, enabling: Command line options.
+ (line 15867)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 9804)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 9807)
+* \xspace: xspace package. (line 7880)
* \year: \day & \month & \year.
- (line 7366)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 8938)
-* \\ (for center): center. (line 2954)
-* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3262)
-* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 3491)
-* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 4520)
-* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4765)
-* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 3432)
-* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 13537)
-* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 4943)
-* \\ for verse: verse. (line 5644)
-* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 9718)
-* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 9739)
-* \\ force line break: \\. (line 5682)
-* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3270)
+ (line 8139)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 9810)
+* \[...\] display math: displaymath. (line 3773)
+* \\ (for center): center. (line 3617)
+* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3925)
+* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 4169)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 5224)
+* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5468)
+* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 4109)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 15066)
+* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 5644)
+* \\ for verse: verse. (line 6356)
+* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 10927)
+* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 10948)
+* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6394)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3933)
* \^: Reserved characters.
- (line 12097)
-* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 12393)
+ (line 13332)
+* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 13663)
* \_: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
-* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 12397)
-* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 4792)
+ (line 13325)
+* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 13667)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5495)
* \{: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
-* \|: Math symbols. (line 8052)
+ (line 13325)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 8962)
* \}: Reserved characters.
- (line 12090)
+ (line 13325)
* \~: Reserved characters.
- (line 12097)
-* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 12401)
-* ^: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 7977)
-* _: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 7977)
-* 'see' and 'see also' index entries: \index. (line 13121)
+ (line 13332)
+* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 13671)
+* ^ superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 8887)
+* ^^J, in \write: \write. (line 15591)
+* _ subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 8887)
* {...} for required arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 529)
-* ~: ~. (line 10244)
+ (line 591)
+* ~: ~. (line 11453)
* a4paper option: Document class options.
- (line 677)
+ (line 742)
* a5paper option: Document class options.
- (line 677)
-* abstract environment: abstract. (line 2819)
-* abstracts: abstract. (line 2819)
-* accents: Accents. (line 12361)
-* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 9217)
+ (line 742)
+* abstract environment: abstract. (line 3482)
+* abstract package: abstract. (line 3503)
+* abstracts: abstract. (line 3482)
+* accents: Accents. (line 13629)
+* accents, defining: \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ (line 1384)
+* accents, defining <1>: \DeclareTextAccent.
+ (line 1418)
+* accents, defining <2>: \DeclareTextAccentDefault.
+ (line 1441)
+* accents, defining <3>: \DeclareTextComposite.
+ (line 1550)
+* accents, defining <4>: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand.
+ (line 1575)
+* accents, defining <5>: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
+ (line 1620)
+* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 10415)
* accessing any character of a font: Symbols by font position.
- (line 12160)
-* acronyms, list of: Glossaries. (line 13357)
-* acute accent: Accents. (line 12382)
-* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 9222)
+ (line 13405)
+* acronyms, list of: Glossaries. (line 14886)
+* acute accent: Accents. (line 13652)
+* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 10420)
* additional packages, loading: Additional packages.
- (line 763)
+ (line 828)
+* adjustbox package: Boxes. (line 11926)
* ae ligature: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12459)
-* algorithm2e package: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 4705)
-* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 7966)
-* amsmath package: array. (line 2914)
-* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 2925)
-* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 3106)
-* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 3309)
-* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 5496)
-* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 7966)
-* amsmath package <6>: Dots. (line 9077)
-* amsmath package <7>: Math functions. (line 9206)
-* amsmath package <8>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9467)
-* amsmath package <9>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9495)
-* amsmath package <10>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9499)
-* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* amsthm package: theorem. (line 5496)
-* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 12518)
-* appendices: \appendix. (line 2391)
-* appendix: \appendix. (line 2391)
-* appendix package: \appendix. (line 2414)
+ (line 13773)
+* algorithm2e package: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 5408)
+* amscd package: Arrows. (line 9869)
+* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 8876)
+* amsfonts package <1>: Arrows. (line 9834)
+* amsmath package: array. (line 3577)
+* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 3588)
+* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 3769)
+* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 3972)
+* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 6199)
+* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 8876)
+* amsmath package <6>: \left & \right. (line 10032)
+* amsmath package <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc..
+ (line 10177)
+* amsmath package <8>: Dots. (line 10232)
+* amsmath package <9>: Math functions. (line 10404)
+* amsmath package <10>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 10689)
+* amsmath package <11>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 10739)
+* amsmath package <12>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 10743)
+* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* amsthm package: theorem. (line 6199)
+* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 13885)
+* answers package: \write. (line 15596)
+* appendices: \appendix. (line 2986)
+* appendix: \appendix. (line 2986)
+* appendix package: \appendix. (line 3009)
* aring: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12455)
-* array (package) package: array. (line 2936)
-* array environment: array. (line 2865)
-* arrays, math: array. (line 2865)
-* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 12306)
-* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 12341)
-* article class: Document classes. (line 635)
-* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 12267)
-* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 12232)
-* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 12235)
-* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 12238)
-* Asymptote package: \line. (line 4397)
-* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
-* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10772)
-* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7009)
-* at-sign: \@. (line 10127)
-* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9718)
-* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 458)
+ (line 13769)
+* array (package) package: array. (line 3599)
+* array environment: array. (line 3528)
+* arrays, math: array. (line 3528)
+* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 13568)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 13609)
+* arrows: Arrows. (line 9834)
+* article class: Document classes. (line 699)
+* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 13514)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 13479)
+* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 13482)
+* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 13485)
+* Asymptote package: \line. (line 5100)
+* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 11767)
+* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12000)
+* Asymptote package <3>: \write18. (line 15699)
+* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7735)
+* at-sign: \@. (line 11336)
+* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 10927)
+* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 486)
* b5paper option: Document class options.
- (line 677)
-* babel package: \chapter. (line 2154)
-* babel package <1>: thebibliography. (line 5286)
-* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 12361)
-* babel package <3>: \today. (line 12548)
+ (line 742)
+* babel package: \chapter. (line 2749)
+* babel package <1>: thebibliography. (line 5987)
+* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 13629)
+* babel package <3>: \today. (line 13915)
* babel package <4>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12875)
-* babel package <5>: \index. (line 13121)
-* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 11312)
-* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 12241)
-* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 12247)
-* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 12244)
-* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 12389)
-* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 9225)
-* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 12404)
-* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 373)
-* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 14087)
-* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3140)
+ (line 14289)
+* babel package <5>: \index. (line 14646)
+* back matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 3019)
+* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 12544)
+* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 13488)
+* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 13494)
+* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 13491)
+* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 13659)
+* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 10423)
+* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 13674)
+* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 397)
+* batchmode: Command line options.
+ (line 15833)
+* beamer package: beamer template. (line 16060)
+* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 16060)
+* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3803)
* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
- (line 725)
-* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
-* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 5239)
-* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
-* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 12250)
-* Big point: Units of length. (line 7499)
+ (line 790)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6119)
+* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 5940)
+* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6119)
+* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 13497)
+* big point: Units of length. (line 8272)
* bigfoot package: Footnotes of footnotes.
- (line 6373)
+ (line 7085)
* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
- (line 711)
-* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 8962)
+ (line 776)
+* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 9915)
* bm package: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9032)
-* bold font: Font styles. (line 1269)
-* bold math: Font styles. (line 1322)
-* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 3064)
+ (line 9901)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 1771)
+* bold math: Font styles. (line 1824)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 3727)
* boldface mathematics: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9006)
-* book class: Document classes. (line 635)
+ (line 9875)
+* book class: Document classes. (line 699)
* book, back matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
+ (line 3019)
* book, end matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
+ (line 3019)
* book, front matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
+ (line 3019)
* book, main matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 2424)
-* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 1930)
-* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1931)
-* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
-* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 6722)
-* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 11275)
-* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 10959)
-* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 11065)
-* boxes: Boxes. (line 10696)
-* bp: Units of length. (line 7499)
-* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 12253)
-* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 12256)
-* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 5665)
-* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 5956)
-* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 9506)
-* breve accent: Accents. (line 12440)
-* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 9228)
+ (line 3019)
+* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 2518)
+* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2519)
+* bounding box: \includegraphics. (line 12978)
+* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11932)
+* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 7448)
+* box, bounding: \includegraphics. (line 12978)
+* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 12507)
+* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12188)
+* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 12296)
+* boxes: Boxes. (line 11923)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 8272)
+* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 13500)
+* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 13503)
+* braces: Delimiters. (line 9958)
+* brackets: Delimiters. (line 9958)
+* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6377)
+* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6668)
+* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 10750)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 13710)
+* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 10426)
* bug reporting: About this document.
- (line 344)
-* bullet lists: itemize. (line 3528)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 8147)
-* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 12259)
-* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 3528)
-* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 8988)
-* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 1272)
-* cap height: Text symbols. (line 12267)
-* caron accent: Accents. (line 12444)
+ (line 373)
+* bullet lists: itemize. (line 4210)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 9055)
+* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 13506)
+* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 4210)
+* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 9941)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 1774)
+* cap height: Text symbols. (line 13514)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 13714)
* catcode: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 6560)
+ (line 7274)
* category code, character: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 6560)
-* cc: Units of length. (line 7512)
-* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 13599)
-* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 12414)
-* center environment: center. (line 2944)
-* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 12238)
+ (line 7274)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 8285)
+* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 15128)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 13684)
+* center environment: center. (line 3607)
+* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 13485)
* centered equations: Document class options.
- (line 715)
-* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 12313)
-* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 2992)
-* centering text, environment for: center. (line 2944)
-* Centimeter: Units of length. (line 7503)
-* chapter: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2089)
+ (line 780)
+* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 13581)
+* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 3655)
+* centering text, environment for: center. (line 3607)
+* centimeter: Units of length. (line 8276)
+* changing case of characters: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 13351)
+* chapter: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2684)
* character category code: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 6560)
+ (line 7274)
+* character encoding: inputenc package. (line 13829)
* character, invisible: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9429)
-* characters, accented: Accents. (line 12361)
+ (line 10641)
+* character, invisible <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10702)
+* characters, accented: Accents. (line 13629)
* characters, case of: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12115)
+ (line 13351)
* characters, non-English: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12449)
+ (line 13763)
* characters, reserved: Reserved characters.
- (line 12083)
+ (line 13317)
* characters, special: Reserved characters.
- (line 12083)
-* check accent: Accents. (line 12444)
-* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 9231)
-* Cicero: Units of length. (line 7512)
-* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 12250)
-* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 12262)
-* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 12393)
-* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 9243)
-* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 12232)
-* citation key: \bibitem. (line 5301)
+ (line 13317)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 13714)
+* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 10429)
+* cicero: Units of length. (line 8285)
+* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 13497)
+* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 13509)
+* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 13663)
+* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 10441)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 13479)
+* citation key: \bibitem. (line 6004)
* class and package commands: Class and package commands.
- (line 849)
+ (line 914)
* class and package difference: Class and package construction.
- (line 788)
+ (line 853)
* class and package structure: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* class file example: Class and package structure.
- (line 835)
+ (line 900)
* class file layout: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* class options: Document class options.
- (line 664)
+ (line 729)
* class options <1>: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* class options <2>: Class and package commands.
- (line 909)
-* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 630)
-* cleveref package: Cross references. (line 2683)
-* cleveref package <1>: \ref. (line 2796)
-* cleveref package <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
+ (line 974)
+* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 694)
+* cleveref package: Cross references. (line 3291)
+* cleveref package <1>: \ref. (line 3404)
+* cleveref package <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6966)
+* CLI: Command line interface.
+ (line 15768)
* clock option to slides class: Document class options.
- (line 757)
-* closing letters: \closing. (line 13615)
-* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 12222)
-* cm: Units of length. (line 7503)
-* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 5543)
+ (line 822)
+* closing letters: \closing. (line 15144)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 13469)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 8276)
+* cm-super package: fontenc package. (line 1327)
+* cmd.exe, used by \write18: \write18. (line 15746)
+* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6246)
* colon character: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9486)
-* color: Color. (line 11077)
-* color <1>: Define colors. (line 11182)
-* color <2>: Colored text. (line 11204)
-* color <3>: Colored boxes. (line 11275)
-* color <4>: Colored pages. (line 11312)
-* color models: Color models. (line 11130)
+ (line 10730)
+* color: Color. (line 12309)
+* color <1>: Define colors. (line 12414)
+* color <2>: Colored text. (line 12436)
+* color <3>: Colored boxes. (line 12507)
+* color <4>: Colored pages. (line 12544)
+* color models: Color models. (line 12362)
* color package commands: Commands for color.
- (line 11177)
+ (line 12409)
* color package options: Color package options.
- (line 11092)
-* color, define: Define colors. (line 11182)
-* colored boxes: Colored boxes. (line 11275)
-* colored page: Colored pages. (line 11312)
-* colored text: Colored text. (line 11204)
-* command line: Command line. (line 13872)
+ (line 12324)
+* color, define: Define colors. (line 12414)
+* colored boxes: Colored boxes. (line 12507)
+* colored page: Colored pages. (line 12544)
+* colored text: Colored text. (line 12436)
+* command line interface: Command line interface.
+ (line 15768)
* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 529)
+ (line 591)
* commands, class and package: Class and package commands.
- (line 849)
+ (line 914)
* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6394)
-* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+ (line 7106)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 7233)
* commands, document class: Class and package construction.
- (line 779)
+ (line 844)
* commands, graphics package: Commands for graphics.
- (line 11621)
+ (line 12856)
* commands, ignore spaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7080)
+ (line 7806)
+* commands, ignore spaces <1>: xspace package. (line 7880)
* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6394)
-* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 6598)
-* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 12267)
-* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 5543)
+ (line 7106)
+* commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 15692)
+* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 7310)
+* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 13514)
+* comprehensive package: Math symbols. (line 8950)
+* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6246)
* configuration, graphics package: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* contents file: Output files. (line 468)
-* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 12179)
-* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 7155)
-* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6659)
-* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 7265)
+ (line 12666)
+* contents file: Output files. (line 496)
+* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 13426)
+* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 7929)
+* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 7385)
+* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 8039)
* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 7183)
-* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 7298)
-* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 5563)
-* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 5621)
-* creating pictures: picture. (line 4143)
-* creating tables: table. (line 4854)
-* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 9732)
-* cross references: Cross references. (line 2651)
-* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 458)
-* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 2749)
-* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 2773)
-* CTAN: CTAN. (line 604)
-* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 12280)
-* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 12291)
-* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 12277)
-* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 12182)
-* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 12274)
-* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 618)
-* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9726)
-* date, today's: \today. (line 12541)
-* datetime package: \today. (line 12562)
-* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 1934)
-* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1935)
-* dcolumn package: array. (line 2936)
-* dd: Units of length. (line 7509)
-* define color: Define colors. (line 11182)
+ (line 7957)
+* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 8072)
+* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 6266)
+* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 6329)
+* creating pictures: picture. (line 4838)
+* creating tables: table. (line 5557)
+* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 10941)
+* cross references: Cross references. (line 3259)
+* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 486)
+* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 3357)
+* cross referencing, across documents: xr package. (line 3410)
+* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 3381)
+* CTAN: CTAN. (line 666)
+* curly braces: Delimiters. (line 9958)
+* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 13527)
+* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 13539)
+* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 13524)
+* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 13429)
+* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 13521)
+* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 680)
+* datatool package: \read. (line 15418)
+* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 10935)
+* date, today's: \today. (line 13908)
+* datetime package: \today. (line 13929)
+* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 2522)
+* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2523)
+* dcolumn package: array. (line 3599)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 8282)
+* declaration form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 1858)
+* declaration form of font style commands: Font styles. (line 1703)
+* define color: Define colors. (line 12414)
* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6394)
-* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+ (line 7106)
+* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 7233)
* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 6750)
-* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6996)
-* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
-* definitions: Definitions. (line 6389)
-* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* delim_0: makeindex. (line 13290)
-* delim_1: makeindex. (line 13294)
-* delim_2: makeindex. (line 13298)
-* delim_n: makeindex. (line 13302)
-* delim_r: makeindex. (line 13306)
-* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 13445)
-* description environment: description. (line 3034)
-* description lists, creating: description. (line 3034)
-* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7009)
-* Didot point: Units of length. (line 7509)
-* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 12378)
+ (line 7476)
+* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 7722)
+* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 7610)
+* definitions: Definitions. (line 7101)
+* delayed \write: \write. (line 15561)
+* delimiters: Delimiters. (line 9958)
+* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* delim_0: makeindex. (line 14815)
+* delim_1: makeindex. (line 14819)
+* delim_2: makeindex. (line 14823)
+* delim_n: makeindex. (line 14827)
+* delim_r: makeindex. (line 14831)
+* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 14974)
+* description environment: description. (line 3697)
+* description lists, creating: description. (line 3697)
+* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7735)
+* didot point: Units of length. (line 8282)
+* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 13648)
* difference between class and package: Class and package construction.
- (line 788)
-* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 9506)
-* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 5843)
-* display math mode: Modes. (line 9618)
+ (line 853)
+* dimen plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8161)
+* directory listings, from system: \write18. (line 15751)
+* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 10750)
+* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 6555)
+* display math mode: Modes. (line 10827)
* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
- (line 4675)
+ (line 5378)
* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
- (line 4675)
-* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 3090)
-* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+ (line 5378)
+* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 3753)
+* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 8796)
* document class commands: Class and package construction.
- (line 779)
+ (line 844)
* document class options: Document class options.
- (line 664)
+ (line 729)
* document class, defined: Starting and ending.
- (line 410)
-* document classes: Document classes. (line 630)
-* document environment: document. (line 3134)
+ (line 438)
+* document classes: Document classes. (line 694)
+* document environment: document. (line 3797)
+* document root name: Jobname. (line 15950)
* document templates: Document templates.
- (line 14080)
-* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 12280)
-* dot accent: Accents. (line 12385)
-* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 9237)
-* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 12385)
-* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 12418)
-* dotless i: Accents. (line 12372)
-* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 8299)
-* dotless j: Accents. (line 12372)
-* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 8321)
-* dots: Dots. (line 9046)
-* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 12185)
-* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 12277)
-* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 9234)
-* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 12319)
-* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 12219)
-* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
-* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 12322)
-* double spacing: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1487)
-* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 12247)
-* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 8962)
+ (line 16053)
+* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 13527)
+* dot accent: Accents. (line 13655)
+* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 10435)
+* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 13655)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 13688)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 13642)
+* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 9208)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 13642)
+* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 9228)
+* dots: Dots. (line 10202)
+* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 13432)
+* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 13524)
+* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 10432)
+* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 13587)
+* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 13466)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 13603)
+* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 13590)
+* double spacing: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 13494)
+* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 9915)
* draft option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
-* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 435)
-* dvips command: Output files. (line 435)
-* dvitype command: Output files. (line 435)
-* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 12288)
-* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 484)
-* ellipses: Dots. (line 9046)
-* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 12203)
-* em: Units of length. (line 7517)
-* em <1>: Units of length. (line 7517)
-* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 12283)
-* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 12344)
-* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 12350)
-* emphasis: Font styles. (line 1253)
-* enclosure list: \encl. (line 13628)
-* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3156)
+ (line 772)
+* dvilualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 562)
+* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 463)
+* dvips command: Output files. (line 463)
+* dvitype command: Output files. (line 463)
+* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 13536)
+* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 515)
+* ellipses: Dots. (line 10202)
+* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 13450)
+* em: Units of length. (line 8290)
+* em <1>: Units of length. (line 8290)
+* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 13530)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 13612)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 13618)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 1755)
+* enclosure list: \encl. (line 15157)
+* encoding, font: \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ (line 1384)
+* encoding, of input files: inputenc package. (line 13829)
+* end matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 3019)
+* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3819)
* ending and starting: Starting and ending.
- (line 399)
-* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 477)
-* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6061)
-* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 3172)
-* enumitem package: list. (line 3880)
+ (line 427)
+* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6773)
+* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 3835)
+* enumitem package: itemize. (line 4270)
+* enumitem package <1>: list. (line 4568)
* environment: Starting and ending.
- (line 418)
-* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 2819)
-* environment, array: array. (line 2865)
-* environment, center: center. (line 2944)
-* environment, description: description. (line 3034)
-* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 3090)
-* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* environment, document: document. (line 3134)
-* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 3172)
-* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* environment, equation: equation. (line 3295)
-* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* environment, figure: figure. (line 3315)
-* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 3373)
-* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 3373)
-* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 3424)
-* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 3485)
-* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 3528)
-* environment, letter: letter. (line 3611)
-* environment, list: list. (line 3616)
-* environment, math: math. (line 3980)
-* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 3992)
-* environment, picture: picture. (line 4143)
-* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
-* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
-* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 4705)
-* environment, table: table. (line 4854)
-* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 4914)
-* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 5239)
-* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 5474)
-* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
-* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 5504)
-* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 5543)
-* environment, verse: verse. (line 5629)
-* environments: Environments. (line 2802)
+ (line 446)
+* environment form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 1870)
+* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 3482)
+* environment, array: array. (line 3528)
+* environment, center: center. (line 3607)
+* environment, description: description. (line 3697)
+* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 3753)
+* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* environment, document: document. (line 3797)
+* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 3835)
+* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* environment, equation: equation. (line 3958)
+* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* environment, figure: figure. (line 3978)
+* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 4036)
+* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 4036)
+* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 4101)
+* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 4163)
+* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 4210)
+* environment, letter: letter. (line 4298)
+* environment, list: list. (line 4303)
+* environment, math: math. (line 4668)
+* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 4680)
+* environment, picture: picture. (line 4838)
+* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 5378)
+* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 5378)
+* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5408)
+* environment, table: table. (line 5557)
+* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 5615)
+* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 5940)
+* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 6177)
+* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 7610)
+* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 6207)
+* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 6246)
+* environment, verse: verse. (line 6341)
+* environments: Environments. (line 3465)
* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 6750)
-* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 13702)
-* EPS files: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* EPS files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* equation environment: equation. (line 3295)
-* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
+ (line 7476)
+* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 15231)
+* EPS files: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* equation environment: equation. (line 3958)
+* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3381)
* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
- (line 721)
-* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 3274)
-* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* equations, environment for: equation. (line 3295)
+ (line 786)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 3937)
+* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* equations, environment for: equation. (line 3958)
* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
- (line 715)
+ (line 780)
+* errorstopmode: Command line options.
+ (line 15833)
* es-zet German letter: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12495)
-* etex command: TeX engines. (line 484)
+ (line 13809)
+* etex command: TeX engines. (line 515)
* eth, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12463)
+ (line 13777)
* etoolbox package: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 12291)
-* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 12291)
-* ex: Units of length. (line 7517)
-* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 7517)
-* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 12297)
+ (line 1018)
+* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 13539)
+* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 13539)
+* eurosym package <1>: Text symbols. (line 13540)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 8290)
+* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 8290)
+* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 13547)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
- (line 677)
+ (line 742)
+* expl3 package: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 622)
+* expl3 package <1>: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 13394)
* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 7977)
+ (line 8887)
+* expressions: Expressions. (line 8473)
* extended Latin: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12449)
-* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 3373)
+ (line 13763)
+* external commands: \write18. (line 15692)
+* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 4036)
+* fallback jobname: Jobname. (line 15969)
* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1390)
-* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 9675)
-* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 9817)
-* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 5574)
-* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 12310)
-* figure environment: figure. (line 3315)
-* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
-* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 4093)
-* figures, inserting: figure. (line 3315)
+ (line 1901)
+* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 10884)
+* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 11026)
+* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 6282)
+* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 13578)
+* figure dash character: Text symbols. (line 13550)
+* figure environment: figure. (line 3978)
+* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3381)
+* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 4781)
+* figures, inserting: figure. (line 3978)
+* file, closing: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
+* file, opening: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
+* file, reading: \read. (line 15393)
* file, root: Splitting the input.
- (line 12576)
-* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 3373)
-* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 3373)
+ (line 13943)
+* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 4036)
+* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 4036)
+* filename for current job: Command line options.
+ (line 15849)
* final option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
+ (line 772)
* first-latex-doc document: About this document.
- (line 356)
-* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 1290)
-* flafter package: Floats. (line 1882)
+ (line 385)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 1792)
+* flafter package: Floats. (line 2470)
* fleqn option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
-* float package: Floats. (line 1852)
-* float page: Floats. (line 1858)
+ (line 772)
+* float package: Floats. (line 2440)
+* float page: Floats. (line 2446)
* flush left equations: Document class options.
- (line 715)
+ (line 780)
* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 5987)
-* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 3424)
-* flushright environment: flushright. (line 3485)
+ (line 6699)
+* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 4101)
+* flushright environment: flushright. (line 4163)
* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1390)
+ (line 1901)
* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1375)
+ (line 1886)
+* font dimension, slant: \/. (line 11575)
+* font encoding: fontenc package. (line 1297)
+* font encoding <1>: \DeclareTextAccent.
+ (line 1418)
+* font encoding, declaring: \DeclareFontEncoding.
+ (line 1384)
* font size: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1470)
-* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 1340)
-* font styles: Font styles. (line 1200)
+ (line 1981)
+* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 1840)
+* font styles: Font styles. (line 1701)
* font symbols, by number: Symbols by font position.
- (line 12160)
-* fonts: Fonts. (line 1194)
-* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6996)
-* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 8988)
-* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+ (line 13405)
+* fontenc: fontenc package. (line 1297)
+* fonts: Fonts. (line 1259)
+* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 7722)
+* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 9941)
+* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 11019)
* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
-* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
-* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 6174)
+ (line 2171)
+* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3381)
+* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 6886)
* footnote, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
- (line 6303)
+ (line 7015)
* footnote, in section headings: Footnotes in section headings.
- (line 6284)
+ (line 6996)
* footnote, of a footnote: Footnotes of footnotes.
- (line 6373)
-* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 4093)
-* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6127)
-* Footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 6202)
-* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 6164)
-* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 3295)
-* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* forward reference: Cross references. (line 2672)
-* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 458)
-* fraction: \frac. (line 9522)
-* fragile commands: \protect. (line 7028)
-* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10827)
-* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10827)
-* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 10832)
-* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* functions, math: Math functions. (line 9101)
+ (line 7085)
+* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 4781)
+* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6839)
+* footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 6914)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 6876)
+* force option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4061)
+* format files, TeX: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 3958)
+* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* forward reference: Cross references. (line 3280)
+* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 486)
+* fraction: \frac. (line 10766)
+* fragile commands: \protect. (line 7754)
+* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12056)
+* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12056)
+* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12061)
+* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* front matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 3019)
+* functions, math: Math functions. (line 10299)
* geometry package: Document class options.
- (line 698)
+ (line 763)
* geometry package <1>: Document class options.
- (line 702)
+ (line 767)
* global options: Document class options.
- (line 664)
+ (line 729)
* global options <1>: Additional packages.
- (line 772)
-* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 13357)
-* glossary: Glossaries. (line 13357)
-* glossary, entries: \newglossaryentry. (line 13405)
-* glossary, entry reference: \gls. (line 13464)
-* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6700)
-* graphics: Graphics. (line 11333)
+ (line 837)
+* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 14886)
+* glossary: Glossaries. (line 14886)
+* glossary, entries: \newglossaryentry. (line 14934)
+* glossary, entry reference: \gls. (line 14993)
+* glue plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8161)
+* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 7426)
+* graphics: Graphics. (line 12565)
* graphics <1>: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* graphics <2>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* graphics package: Graphics. (line 11333)
+ (line 12666)
+* graphics <2>: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* graphics package: Graphics. (line 12565)
* graphics package <1>: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* graphics package <2>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+ (line 12666)
+* graphics package <2>: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
* graphics package commands: Commands for graphics.
- (line 11621)
+ (line 12856)
* graphics package options: Graphics package options.
- (line 11370)
-* graphics packages: \line. (line 4397)
-* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
-* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* graphics, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
-* grave accent: Accents. (line 12397)
-* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 9240)
-* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 12300)
-* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 8040)
-* group, and environments: Environments. (line 2814)
-* group_skip: makeindex. (line 13237)
-* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 9231)
-* hacek accent: Accents. (line 12444)
-* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 12513)
-* hat accent: Accents. (line 12393)
-* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 9243)
-* header style: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
+ (line 12602)
+* graphics packages: \line. (line 5100)
+* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13282)
+* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* graphics, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13282)
+* graphpap package: \graphpaper. (line 5051)
+* grave accent: Accents. (line 13667)
+* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 10438)
+* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 13557)
+* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 8950)
+* Greek letters: Greek letters. (line 10256)
+* grfext package: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
+ (line 12774)
+* group, and environments: Environments. (line 3477)
+* group_skip: makeindex. (line 14762)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 13714)
+* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 13880)
+* hard space: ~. (line 11453)
+* hat accent: Accents. (line 13663)
+* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 10441)
+* header style: \pagestyle. (line 11019)
* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
+ (line 2171)
* hello, world: Starting and ending.
- (line 399)
-* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 1852)
+ (line 427)
+* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 2440)
* home page for manual: About this document.
- (line 321)
-* horizontal space: \hss. (line 10040)
-* horizontal space, stretchable: \hss. (line 10040)
+ (line 355)
+* horizontal bar character: Text symbols. (line 13560)
+* horizontal paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
+ (line 8714)
+* horizontal space: \hss. (line 11249)
+* horizontal space, stretchable: \hss. (line 11249)
* horizontal spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9429)
-* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 12422)
-* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
-* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6263)
-* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 9791)
+ (line 10641)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 13692)
+* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 6966)
+* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6975)
+* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 11000)
* hyperref package <3>: Command line input.
- (line 14001)
-* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 5907)
-* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 5843)
-* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 5808)
-* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
+ (line 15904)
+* hyphen character, non-breaking: Text symbols. (line 13571)
+* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6619)
+* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6555)
+* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6520)
+* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11932)
+* háček accent, math: Math accents. (line 10429)
* Icelandic eth: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12463)
+ (line 13777)
* Icelandic thorn: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12499)
-* idx file: \index. (line 13171)
+ (line 13813)
+* idx file: \index. (line 14696)
* ij letter, Dutch: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12475)
-* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 477)
-* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* in: Units of length. (line 7496)
-* in-line formulas: math. (line 3980)
-* inch: Units of length. (line 7496)
-* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
+ (line 13789)
+* immediate \write: \write. (line 15556)
+* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* in: Units of length. (line 8269)
+* inch: Units of length. (line 8269)
+* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
* indent, forcing: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 7761)
-* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 4089)
-* indentfirst package: \part. (line 2079)
-* indentfirst package <1>: \chapter. (line 2141)
-* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 2236)
-* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 2302)
+ (line 8665)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 4777)
+* indentfirst package: \part. (line 2674)
+* indentfirst package <1>: \chapter. (line 2736)
+* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 2831)
+* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 2897)
* indentfirst package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2379)
+ (line 2974)
* indentfirst package <5>: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 7803)
-* indent_length: makeindex. (line 13318)
-* indent_space: makeindex. (line 13314)
-* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 13121)
-* index entry: \index. (line 13071)
-* index package: \index. (line 13166)
-* index, page range: \index. (line 13105)
-* index, printing: \printindex. (line 13342)
-* index, processing: makeindex. (line 13186)
-* index, style file: makeindex. (line 13198)
-* indexes: Indexes. (line 13035)
-* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 10007)
-* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 10620)
-* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 9636)
+ (line 8707)
+* indent_length: makeindex. (line 14843)
+* indent_space: makeindex. (line 14839)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 14646)
+* index entry: \index. (line 14596)
+* index package: \index. (line 14691)
+* index, multiple: Indexes. (line 14586)
+* index, page range: \index. (line 14630)
+* index, printing: \printindex. (line 14871)
+* index, processing: makeindex. (line 14711)
+* index, style file: makeindex. (line 14723)
+* indexes: Indexes. (line 14560)
+* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 11216)
+* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 11847)
+* inline formulas: math. (line 4668)
+* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 10845)
* input file: Splitting the input.
- (line 12572)
+ (line 13939)
* input, on command line: Command line input.
- (line 13997)
-* input/output, to terminal: Terminal input/output.
- (line 13791)
-* inserting figures: figure. (line 3315)
+ (line 15896)
+* input/output: Input/output. (line 15320)
+* input/output, to terminal: Input/output. (line 15320)
+* inputenc: inputenc package. (line 13820)
+* inserting figures: figure. (line 3978)
* insertions of special characters: Special insertions.
- (line 12077)
-* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 9627)
+ (line 13311)
+* interface, command line: Command line interface.
+ (line 15768)
+* interline space: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 10836)
* invisible character: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9429)
-* italic correction: \/. (line 10324)
-* italic font: Font styles. (line 1275)
-* itemize environment: itemize. (line 3528)
-* item_0: makeindex. (line 13261)
-* item_01: makeindex. (line 13270)
-* item_1: makeindex. (line 13264)
-* item_12: makeindex. (line 13280)
-* item_2: makeindex. (line 13267)
-* item_x1: makeindex. (line 13274)
-* item_x2: makeindex. (line 13284)
-* JPEG files: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* JPEG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* JPG files: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* JPG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
-* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 3452)
-* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 373)
-* label: Cross references. (line 2651)
-* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 3034)
-* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 391)
-* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 373)
+ (line 10641)
+* invisible character <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10702)
+* italic correction: \/. (line 11541)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 1777)
+* itemize environment: itemize. (line 4210)
+* item_0: makeindex. (line 14786)
+* item_01: makeindex. (line 14795)
+* item_1: makeindex. (line 14789)
+* item_12: makeindex. (line 14805)
+* item_2: makeindex. (line 14792)
+* item_x1: makeindex. (line 14799)
+* item_x2: makeindex. (line 14809)
+* jobname: Command line options.
+ (line 15849)
+* jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 15950)
+* JPEG files: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* JPG files: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 4183)
+* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 4130)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 397)
+* label: Cross references. (line 3259)
+* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 3697)
+* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 419)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 397)
* landscape option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
+ (line 772)
* landscape orientation: Document class options.
- (line 718)
-* latex command: Output files. (line 435)
-* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 12188)
-* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 373)
+ (line 783)
+* latex: TeX engines. (line 513)
+* latex command: Output files. (line 463)
+* LaTeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 13435)
+* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 397)
* LaTeX Project team: About this document.
- (line 340)
+ (line 369)
* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e: About this document.
- (line 336)
+ (line 365)
+* latex-dev: TeX engines. (line 563)
* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document.
- (line 353)
-* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 12191)
+ (line 382)
+* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 13438)
+* LaTeX3 syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 622)
* <latexrefman@tug.org> email address: About this document.
- (line 340)
+ (line 369)
+* latexsym package: Arrows. (line 9834)
* Latin letters, additional: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12449)
-* layout commands: Layout. (line 1517)
+ (line 13763)
+* layout commands: Layout. (line 2015)
* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
-* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 12306)
-* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 12253)
-* left quote: Text symbols. (line 12207)
-* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 12319)
-* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 12325)
+ (line 2171)
+* leaders, dots in table of contents: \@dottedtocline. (line 14317)
+* leading: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 13568)
+* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 13500)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 13454)
+* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 13587)
+* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 13593)
* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 721)
-* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 3452)
-* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 3424)
-* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 9605)
+ (line 786)
+* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 4130)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 4101)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 10814)
* legalpaper option: Document class options.
- (line 677)
-* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 7563)
-* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 6700)
-* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 7385)
-* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 7535)
+ (line 742)
+* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 8336)
+* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 7426)
+* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 8158)
+* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 8308)
* leqno option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
-* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 12303)
-* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 13244)
-* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 13253)
-* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 13257)
-* letter class: Document classes. (line 635)
-* letter environment: letter. (line 3611)
+ (line 772)
+* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 13565)
+* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 14769)
+* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 14778)
+* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 14782)
+* letter class: Document classes. (line 699)
+* letter environment: letter. (line 4298)
* letterpaper option: Document class options.
- (line 677)
-* letters, accented: Accents. (line 12361)
+ (line 742)
+* letters, accented: Accents. (line 13629)
* letters, additional Latin: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12449)
-* letters, ending: \closing. (line 13615)
-* letters, starting: \opening. (line 13720)
-* letters, writing: Letters. (line 13494)
-* line break, forcing: \\. (line 5682)
-* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 5665)
-* line breaks, changing: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 5866)
+ (line 13763)
+* letters, ending: \closing. (line 15144)
+* letters, starting: \opening. (line 15249)
+* letters, writing: Letters. (line 15023)
+* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6394)
+* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6377)
+* line breaks, changing: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6578)
* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 5925)
-* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 9506)
+ (line 6637)
+* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 10750)
* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 5925)
-* lines in tables: tabular. (line 4914)
-* line_max: makeindex. (line 13310)
-* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 1326)
-* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 4914)
-* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 4705)
-* list environment: list. (line 3616)
-* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 7239)
-* list of figures file: Output files. (line 468)
-* list of tables file: Output files. (line 468)
-* listings package: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
-* listings package <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
-* lists of items: itemize. (line 3528)
-* lists of items, generic: list. (line 3616)
-* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 3172)
+ (line 6637)
+* lines in tables: tabular. (line 5615)
+* line_max: makeindex. (line 14835)
+* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 1828)
+* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 5615)
+* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 5408)
+* list environment: list. (line 4303)
+* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 8013)
+* list of figures file: Output files. (line 496)
+* list of tables file: Output files. (line 496)
+* listings package: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 6276)
+* listings package <2>: \verb. (line 6326)
+* lists of items: itemize. (line 4210)
+* lists of items, generic: list. (line 4303)
+* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 3835)
+* lmodern package: fontenc package. (line 1327)
* loading additional packages: Additional packages.
- (line 763)
-* log file: Output files. (line 453)
-* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 12188)
-* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 12191)
-* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 12229)
+ (line 828)
+* locale information, from system: \write18. (line 15751)
+* log file: Output files. (line 481)
+* log file, writing to: \write. (line 15526)
+* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 13435)
+* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 13438)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 13476)
* long command: Class and package commands.
- (line 866)
-* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 12219)
+ (line 931)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 13466)
* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1375)
+ (line 1886)
* lowercase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12115)
-* LR box: picture. (line 4240)
-* LR mode: Modes. (line 9605)
-* lrbox: lrbox. (line 11037)
+ (line 13351)
+* LR box: picture. (line 4925)
+* LR mode: Modes. (line 10814)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 12267)
* lshort document: About this document.
- (line 364)
-* ltugboat class: tugboat template. (line 14211)
-* lualatex command: TeX engines. (line 501)
-* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 501)
-* m-width: Units of length. (line 7517)
-* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 378)
-* macron accent: Accents. (line 12389)
-* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 9225)
+ (line 388)
+* lualatex: TeX engines. (line 531)
+* lualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 564)
+* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 532)
+* LuaTeX, 256 output streams in: \write. (line 15538)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 8290)
+* macron accent: Accents. (line 13659)
+* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 10423)
* macros2e package: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 6584)
-* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 3239)
-* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10705)
-* makeindex: makeindex. (line 13186)
-* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 13186)
-* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 13198)
-* making a title page: titlepage. (line 5504)
-* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 7664)
-* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
-* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 12310)
-* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* math accents: Math accents. (line 9217)
-* math environment: math. (line 3980)
-* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 7886)
-* math functions: Math functions. (line 9101)
-* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 9480)
-* math mode: Modes. (line 9615)
-* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 7886)
+ (line 7296)
+* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 3902)
+* mail merges: \read. (line 15418)
+* main matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
+ (line 3019)
+* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11932)
+* makeindex: makeindex. (line 14711)
+* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 14711)
+* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 14723)
+* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6207)
+* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 8568)
+* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 8746)
+* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 13578)
+* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* math accents: Math accents. (line 10415)
+* math environment: math. (line 4668)
+* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 8796)
+* math functions: Math functions. (line 10299)
+* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 10724)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 10824)
+* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 8796)
* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9311)
+ (line 10509)
* math mode, spacing <1>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9429)
-* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 9368)
-* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 8040)
-* math, bold: Font styles. (line 1322)
-* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 7966)
-* mathtools package <1>: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9305)
-* mathtools package <2>: \smash. (line 9423)
-* mathtools package <3>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9459)
-* MetaPost package: \line. (line 4397)
+ (line 10641)
+* math mode, spacing <2>: \mathstrut. (line 10702)
+* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 10580)
+* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 8950)
+* math, arrows: Arrows. (line 9834)
+* math, bold: Font styles. (line 1824)
+* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 8876)
+* mathtools package <1>: Delimiters. (line 9993)
+* mathtools package <2>: \left & \right. (line 10032)
+* mathtools package <3>: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 10503)
+* mathtools package <4>: \smash. (line 10635)
+* mathtools package <5>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 10681)
+* MetaPost package: \line. (line 5100)
* mfirstuc package: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12154)
+ (line 13391)
* mhchem package: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 8033)
-* Millimeter: Units of length. (line 7506)
-* minipage environment: minipage. (line 3992)
-* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 3992)
-* minted package: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
-* minted package <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
-* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 618)
-* mm: Units of length. (line 7506)
-* modes: Modes. (line 9595)
-* monospace font: Font styles. (line 1290)
-* moving arguments: \protect. (line 7041)
-* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 6202)
-* mu: Units of length. (line 7528)
-* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 7528)
-* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 1534)
-* multilingual support: Accents. (line 12361)
-* multind package: Indexes. (line 13061)
-* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 9506)
-* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 13442)
-* NBSP: ~. (line 10244)
+ (line 8943)
+* millimeter: Units of length. (line 8279)
+* minipage environment: minipage. (line 4680)
+* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 4680)
+* minted package: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 6276)
+* minted package <2>: \verb. (line 6326)
+* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 685)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 8279)
+* modes: Modes. (line 10804)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 1792)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 7767)
+* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 6914)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 8301)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 8301)
+* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 2032)
+* multilingual support: Accents. (line 13629)
+* multind package: Indexes. (line 14586)
+* multiple indexes: Indexes. (line 14586)
+* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 10750)
+* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 14971)
+* name of document root: Jobname. (line 15950)
+* NBSP: ~. (line 11453)
* nested \include, not allowed: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 12744)
+ (line 14114)
* new class commands: Class and package construction.
- (line 779)
+ (line 844)
* new command, check: Class and package commands.
- (line 864)
+ (line 929)
* new command, definition: Class and package commands.
- (line 939)
+ (line 1004)
* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6394)
-* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 6519)
+ (line 7106)
+* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 7233)
* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 5744)
-* new line, starting: \\. (line 5682)
-* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 5784)
-* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6028)
+ (line 6456)
+* new line, starting: \\. (line 6394)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6496)
+* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6740)
+* newline, in \write: \write. (line 15591)
+* noheader option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4064)
+* non-breaking hyphen character: Text symbols. (line 13571)
* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12449)
-* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
+ (line 13763)
+* nonstopmode: Command line options.
+ (line 15833)
+* nosearch option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4067)
+* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 8746)
* notitlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
-* null delimiter: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 7239)
-* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 1326)
-* oblique font: Font styles. (line 1287)
+ (line 772)
+* null delimiter: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 8013)
+* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 1828)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 1789)
* oe ligature: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12491)
-* ogonek: Accents. (line 12426)
-* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 1326)
-* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 1522)
+ (line 13805)
+* ogonek: Accents. (line 13696)
+* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 1828)
+* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 2020)
* onecolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 736)
+ (line 801)
* oneside option: Document class options.
- (line 736)
+ (line 801)
+* open a file: \openin & \openout.
+ (line 15329)
* openany option: Document class options.
- (line 736)
+ (line 801)
* openbib option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
-* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 12207)
+ (line 772)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 13454)
* openright option: Document class options.
- (line 736)
-* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 477)
+ (line 801)
+* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* operating system information: \write18. (line 15751)
* options, class: Class and package commands.
- (line 909)
+ (line 974)
* options, color package: Color package options.
- (line 11092)
+ (line 12324)
* options, command line: Command line options.
- (line 13914)
+ (line 15812)
* options, document class: Document class options.
- (line 664)
+ (line 729)
* options, document class <1>: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* options, global: Additional packages.
- (line 772)
+ (line 837)
* options, graphics package: Graphics package options.
- (line 11370)
+ (line 12602)
* options, package: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* options, package <1>: Class and package commands.
- (line 909)
-* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 12310)
+ (line 974)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 13578)
* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12487)
-* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 9636)
-* overbar accent: Accents. (line 12389)
-* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 9237)
+ (line 13801)
+* OT1: fontenc package. (line 1297)
+* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 10845)
+* output directory for all external files: Command line options.
+ (line 15854)
+* overbar accent: Accents. (line 13659)
+* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 10435)
* overlining: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9266)
-* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 373)
+ (line 10464)
+* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 397)
+* overwrite option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4061)
* package file layout: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* package options: Class and package structure.
- (line 802)
+ (line 867)
* package options <1>: Class and package commands.
- (line 909)
-* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 7966)
-* package, amsmath: array. (line 2914)
-* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 2925)
-* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 3106)
-* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 3309)
-* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 5496)
-* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 7966)
-* package, amsmath <6>: Dots. (line 9077)
-* package, amsmath <7>: Math functions. (line 9206)
-* package, amsmath <8>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9467)
-* package, amsmath <9>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9495)
-* package, amsmath <10>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 9499)
-* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 5496)
-* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 12518)
-* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 2414)
-* package, array (package): array. (line 2936)
-* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 4397)
-* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
-* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10772)
-* package, babel: \chapter. (line 2154)
-* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 5286)
-* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 12361)
-* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 12548)
+ (line 974)
+* package, abstract: abstract. (line 3503)
+* package, adjustbox: Boxes. (line 11926)
+* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* package, amscd: Arrows. (line 9869)
+* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 8876)
+* package, amsfonts <1>: Arrows. (line 9834)
+* package, amsmath: array. (line 3577)
+* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 3588)
+* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 3769)
+* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 3972)
+* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 6199)
+* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 8876)
+* package, amsmath <6>: \left & \right. (line 10032)
+* package, amsmath <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc..
+ (line 10177)
+* package, amsmath <8>: Dots. (line 10232)
+* package, amsmath <9>: Math functions. (line 10404)
+* package, amsmath <10>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 10689)
+* package, amsmath <11>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 10739)
+* package, amsmath <12>: Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 10743)
+* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 6199)
+* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 13885)
+* package, answers: \write. (line 15596)
+* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 3009)
+* package, array (package): array. (line 3599)
+* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 5100)
+* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 11767)
+* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12000)
+* package, Asymptote <3>: \write18. (line 15699)
+* package, babel: \chapter. (line 2749)
+* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 5987)
+* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 13629)
+* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 13915)
* package, babel <4>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12875)
-* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 13121)
+ (line 14289)
+* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 14646)
+* package, beamer: beamer template. (line 16060)
* package, bigfoot: Footnotes of footnotes.
- (line 6373)
+ (line 7085)
* package, bm: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9032)
-* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 2683)
-* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 2796)
-* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
-* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 5563)
-* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 5621)
-* package, datetime: \today. (line 12562)
-* package, dcolumn: array. (line 2936)
-* package, enumitem: list. (line 3880)
-* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 13702)
+ (line 9901)
+* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 3291)
+* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 3404)
+* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6966)
+* package, cm-super: fontenc package. (line 1327)
+* package, comprehensive: Math symbols. (line 8950)
+* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 6266)
+* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 6329)
+* package, datatool: \read. (line 15418)
+* package, datetime: \today. (line 13929)
+* package, dcolumn: array. (line 3599)
+* package, enumitem: itemize. (line 4270)
+* package, enumitem <1>: list. (line 4568)
+* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 15231)
* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 12291)
-* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 9675)
-* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 9817)
-* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 5574)
-* package, flafter: Floats. (line 1882)
-* package, float: Floats. (line 1852)
+ (line 1018)
+* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 13539)
+* package, eurosym <1>: Text symbols. (line 13540)
+* package, expl3: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 622)
+* package, expl3 <1>: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 13394)
+* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 10884)
+* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 11026)
+* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 6282)
+* package, flafter: Floats. (line 2470)
+* package, float: Floats. (line 2440)
* package, geometry: Document class options.
- (line 698)
+ (line 763)
* package, geometry <1>: Document class options.
- (line 702)
-* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 6254)
-* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6263)
-* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 9791)
+ (line 767)
+* package, graphpap: \graphpaper. (line 5051)
+* package, grfext: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
+ (line 12774)
+* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 6966)
+* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6975)
+* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 11000)
* package, hyperref <3>: Command line input.
- (line 14001)
-* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 2079)
-* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 2141)
-* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 2236)
-* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 2302)
+ (line 15904)
+* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 2674)
+* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 2736)
+* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 2831)
+* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 2897)
* package, indentfirst <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2379)
+ (line 2974)
* package, indentfirst <5>: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 7803)
-* package, index: \index. (line 13166)
-* package, listings: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
-* package, listings <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
+ (line 8707)
+* package, index: \index. (line 14691)
+* package, latexsym: Arrows. (line 9834)
+* package, listings: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 6276)
+* package, listings <2>: \verb. (line 6326)
+* package, lmodern: fontenc package. (line 1327)
* package, macros2e: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 6584)
-* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 7966)
-* package, mathtools <1>: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9305)
-* package, mathtools <2>: \smash. (line 9423)
-* package, mathtools <3>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9459)
-* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 4397)
+ (line 7296)
+* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 8876)
+* package, mathtools <1>: Delimiters. (line 9993)
+* package, mathtools <2>: \left & \right. (line 10032)
+* package, mathtools <3>: Over- and Underlining.
+ (line 10503)
+* package, mathtools <4>: \smash. (line 10635)
+* package, mathtools <5>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
+ (line 10681)
+* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 5100)
* package, mfirstuc: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12154)
+ (line 13391)
* package, mhchem: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 8033)
-* package, minted: tabbing. (line 4845)
-* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 5568)
-* package, minted <2>: \verb. (line 5618)
-* package, multind: Indexes. (line 13061)
-* package, pict2e: \line. (line 4397)
-* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 12361)
-* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 12548)
+ (line 8943)
+* package, minted: tabbing. (line 5548)
+* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 6276)
+* package, minted <2>: \verb. (line 6326)
+* package, multind: Indexes. (line 14586)
+* package, pict2e: \line. (line 5100)
+* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 13629)
+* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 13915)
* package, polyglossia <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12875)
-* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 13121)
-* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 4397)
-* package, sagetex: Command line options.
- (line 13970)
-* package, setspace: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1487)
-* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 13061)
-* package, siunitx: ~. (line 10270)
-* package, symbols: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+ (line 14290)
+* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 14646)
+* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 5100)
+* package, setspace: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2377)
+* package, shellesc: \write18. (line 15757)
+* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 14586)
+* package, siunitx: minipage. (line 4811)
+* package, siunitx <1>: ~. (line 11484)
+* package, suffix: \@ifstar. (line 7370)
+* package, texosquery: \write18. (line 15751)
* package, textcase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12151)
-* package, textcomp: Font styles. (line 1326)
-* package, TikZ: \line. (line 4397)
-* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
-* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10771)
-* package, titlesec: \part. (line 2083)
-* package, titlesec <1>: \chapter. (line 2162)
-* package, titlesec <2>: \section. (line 2240)
-* package, titlesec <3>: \subsection. (line 2306)
-* package, titlesec <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2383)
+ (line 13388)
+* package, TikZ: \line. (line 5100)
+* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 11767)
+* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11999)
+* package, tikz-cd: Arrows. (line 9869)
+* package, titlesec: Sectioning. (line 2598)
+* package, titlesec <1>: \part. (line 2678)
+* package, titlesec <2>: \chapter. (line 2757)
+* package, titlesec <3>: \section. (line 2835)
+* package, titlesec <4>: \subsection. (line 2901)
+* package, titlesec <5>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2978)
* package, tocbibbind: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12886)
+ (line 14276)
* package, tocloft: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12886)
+ (line 14276)
* package, ulem: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9275)
-* package, url: \verb. (line 5614)
-* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 5574)
+ (line 10473)
+* package, unicode-math: Greek letters. (line 10287)
+* package, url: \verb. (line 6323)
+* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 6282)
+* package, xparse: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 622)
+* package, xparse <1>: \@ifstar. (line 7370)
+* package, xstring: Jobname. (line 15997)
* packages, loading additional: Additional packages.
- (line 763)
+ (line 828)
* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6086)
+ (line 6798)
* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6086)
-* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 5956)
+ (line 6798)
+* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6668)
* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
-* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 2749)
-* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 9752)
-* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 9894)
-* page styles: Page styles. (line 9669)
-* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 11312)
-* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 13323)
-* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 9534)
-* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+ (line 2171)
+* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 3357)
+* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 10961)
+* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 11103)
+* page styles: Page styles. (line 10878)
+* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 12544)
+* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 14848)
+* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 10008)
+* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 2544)
* paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2324)
+ (line 2919)
* paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 7810)
-* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 4089)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
+ (line 8714)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 4777)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line 5378)
* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation & quote.
- (line 4675)
-* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 9601)
-* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 10861)
-* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 12211)
-* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 7708)
-* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 10861)
-* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 7664)
-* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 6174)
+ (line 5378)
+* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 10810)
+* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 12090)
+* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 13458)
+* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 8612)
+* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 12090)
+* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 8568)
+* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 6886)
* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
-* part: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* part <1>: \part. (line 2035)
-* pc: Units of length. (line 7493)
-* PDF graphic files: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* PDF graphic files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 445)
-* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 445)
-* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 484)
-* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 10127)
-* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 12313)
-* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 10127)
-* period, spacing after: \@. (line 10127)
-* pica: Units of length. (line 7493)
-* pict2e package: \line. (line 4397)
-* pict2e package <1>: \line. (line 4397)
-* picture environment: picture. (line 4143)
-* pictures, creating: picture. (line 4143)
-* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 12211)
-* placement of floats: Floats. (line 1831)
-* plural: \newglossaryentry. (line 13450)
-* PNG files: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 11434)
-* PNG files <1>: \includegraphics. (line 11627)
-* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 5629)
-* Point: Units of length. (line 7489)
+ (line 2171)
+* parent directories, cannot write to: \write and security.
+ (line 15620)
+* parentheses: Delimiters. (line 9958)
+* part: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* part <1>: \part. (line 2630)
+* pattern, current tab stops, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5453)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 8266)
+* PDF graphic files: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* pdflatex: TeX engines. (line 514)
+* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 473)
+* pdflatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 565)
+* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 473)
+* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 515)
+* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 11336)
+* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 13581)
+* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 11336)
+* period, spacing after: \@. (line 11336)
+* pica: Units of length. (line 8266)
+* pict2e package: \line. (line 5100)
+* pict2e package <1>: \line. (line 5100)
+* picture environment: picture. (line 4838)
+* pictures, creating: picture. (line 4838)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 13458)
+* placement of floats: Floats. (line 2419)
+* platex: TeX engines. (line 553)
+* platex-dev: TeX engines. (line 566)
+* plural: \newglossaryentry. (line 14979)
+* PNG files: \includegraphics. (line 12862)
+* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6341)
+* point: Units of length. (line 8262)
* polish l: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12479)
-* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 12361)
-* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 12548)
+ (line 13793)
+* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 13629)
+* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 13915)
* polyglossia package <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12875)
-* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 13121)
+ (line 14290)
+* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 14646)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
- (line 718)
-* position, in picture: picture. (line 4214)
+ (line 783)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 4896)
* positional parameter: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6440)
-* postamble: makeindex. (line 13234)
-* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 13732)
-* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 12215)
-* preamble: makeindex. (line 13230)
+ (line 7154)
+* postamble: makeindex. (line 14759)
+* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 15261)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 13462)
+* preamble: makeindex. (line 14755)
* preamble, defined: Starting and ending.
- (line 415)
+ (line 443)
+* prerelease testing: TeX engines. (line 569)
* prompt, *: Recovering from errors.
- (line 14060)
-* pronunciation: Overview. (line 391)
-* PSTricks package: \line. (line 4397)
-* pt: Units of length. (line 7489)
+ (line 16032)
+* pronunciation: Overview. (line 419)
+* PSTricks package: \line. (line 5100)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 8262)
* quad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9356)
-* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 12316)
-* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
-* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 4675)
-* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 12331)
-* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
+ (line 10568)
+* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 13584)
+* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 5378)
+* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 5378)
+* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 13599)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 13603)
* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
- (line 4675)
+ (line 5378)
* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
- (line 4675)
-* radical: \sqrt. (line 9569)
-* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
-* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 3485)
-* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 3452)
-* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 3424)
+ (line 5378)
+* radical: \sqrt. (line 10778)
+* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 4183)
+* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 4163)
+* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 4130)
+* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 4101)
+* read a file: \read. (line 15393)
* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 6750)
-* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 2672)
-* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 458)
-* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 12338)
-* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 9585)
-* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 7837)
-* report class: Document classes. (line 635)
+ (line 7476)
+* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 3280)
+* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 486)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 13606)
+* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 10794)
+* release candidates: TeX engines. (line 569)
+* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 8746)
+* report class: Document classes. (line 699)
* reporting bugs: About this document.
- (line 344)
+ (line 373)
* reserved characters: Reserved characters.
- (line 12083)
-* resizing: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
-* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 12341)
-* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 12256)
-* right quote: Text symbols. (line 12222)
-* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 12322)
-* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 12328)
+ (line 13317)
+* resizing: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13282)
+* restricted shell access: \write18. (line 15739)
+* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 13609)
+* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 13503)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 13469)
+* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 13590)
+* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 13596)
* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 721)
-* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 3503)
-* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 3485)
-* ring accent: Accents. (line 12430)
-* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 9246)
-* robust commands: \protect. (line 7028)
-* roman font: Font styles. (line 1278)
+ (line 786)
+* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 4183)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 4163)
+* rigid lengths: Lengths. (line 8161)
+* ring accent: Accents. (line 13700)
+* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 10444)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 7754)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 1780)
* root file: Splitting the input.
- (line 12576)
-* roots: \sqrt. (line 9569)
-* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
-* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
-* rotation: \rotatebox. (line 11949)
-* row, tabbing: tabbing. (line 4745)
-* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6700)
+ (line 13943)
+* roots: \sqrt. (line 10778)
+* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 13183)
+* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 13183)
+* rotation: \rotatebox. (line 13183)
+* row, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5448)
+* rubber lengths: Lengths. (line 8161)
+* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 7426)
* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1673)
-* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 9810)
-* sagetex package: Command line options.
- (line 13970)
-* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 1284)
-* Scaled point: Units of length. (line 7515)
-* scaling: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
-* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 8988)
-* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 1272)
-* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 2012)
-* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2013)
-* section: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* section <1>: \section. (line 2182)
-* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 2773)
-* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 2013)
-* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 12226)
-* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 2452)
-* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* sectioning, part: \part. (line 2035)
+ (line 2171)
+* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 11019)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 1786)
+* scaled point: Units of length. (line 8288)
+* scaling: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13282)
+* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 9941)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 1774)
+* scrollmode: Command line options.
+ (line 15833)
+* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 2607)
+* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2608)
+* section: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* section <1>: \section. (line 2777)
+* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3381)
+* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 2608)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 13473)
+* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 3055)
+* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* sectioning, part: \part. (line 2630)
+* security and \write: \write and security.
+ (line 15604)
+* see and see also index entries: \index. (line 14646)
+* self-contained sources: filecontents. (line 4072)
* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1417)
-* setspace package: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1487)
-* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 7298)
+ (line 1928)
+* setspace package: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2377)
+* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 8072)
+* sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 15746)
* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1457)
+ (line 1968)
* sharp S letters: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12495)
-* showidx package: Indexes. (line 13061)
-* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 5543)
-* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 12197)
-* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 12325)
-* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 12219)
-* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 12331)
-* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 12328)
-* siunitx package: ~. (line 10270)
-* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 1340)
-* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6700)
-* slanted font: Font styles. (line 1287)
-* slides class: Document classes. (line 635)
-* sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 5879)
-* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 5879)
-* small caps font: Font styles. (line 1281)
-* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 13454)
-* sp: Units of length. (line 7515)
-* space, hard: ~. (line 10244)
-* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 10040)
-* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 10649)
+ (line 13809)
+* shell access: \write18. (line 15692)
+* shell escape: Command line options.
+ (line 15867)
+* SHELL, environment variables: \write18. (line 15746)
+* shellesc package: \write18. (line 15757)
+* showidx package: Indexes. (line 14586)
+* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6246)
+* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 13444)
+* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 13593)
+* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 13466)
+* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 13599)
+* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 13596)
+* siunitx package: minipage. (line 4811)
+* siunitx package <1>: ~. (line 11484)
+* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 1840)
+* skip plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8161)
+* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 7426)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 1789)
+* slides class: Document classes. (line 699)
+* sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 6591)
+* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 6591)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 1783)
+* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 14983)
+* source files, making self-contained: filecontents. (line 4072)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 8288)
+* space between lines: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
+ (line 2304)
+* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 11249)
+* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 11876)
* space, negative thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 10300)
+ (line 11513)
* space, thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 10300)
-* space, unbreakable: ~. (line 10244)
-* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 10569)
-* spaces: Spaces. (line 9922)
+ (line 11513)
+* space, unbreakable: ~. (line 11453)
+* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 11796)
+* spaces: Spaces. (line 11131)
* spaces, ignore around commands: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7080)
+ (line 7806)
+* spaces, ignore around commands <1>: xspace package. (line 7880)
* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9311)
-* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing. (line 10173)
-* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 10193)
+ (line 10509)
+* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing. (line 11382)
+* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 11402)
* spacing, math mode: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9429)
-* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 12310)
+ (line 10641)
+* spacing, math mode <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10702)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 13578)
* special characters: Reserved characters.
- (line 12083)
+ (line 13317)
* special characters <1>: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12449)
+ (line 13763)
* special insertions: Special insertions.
- (line 12077)
-* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 1831)
+ (line 13311)
+* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 2419)
* splitting the input file: Splitting the input.
- (line 12572)
-* square root: \sqrt. (line 9569)
-* stack math: \stackrel. (line 9585)
-* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 6598)
+ (line 13939)
+* square root: \sqrt. (line 10778)
+* stack math: \stackrel. (line 10794)
+* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 7310)
* starred form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 6413)
-* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6028)
+ (line 7127)
+* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6740)
* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 5987)
+ (line 6699)
* starting and ending: Starting and ending.
- (line 399)
+ (line 427)
* starting on a right-hand page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 5987)
-* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 12215)
-* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
-* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 12335)
-* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 12331)
-* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 10007)
-* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 10620)
-* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 1662)
-* strut: \strut. (line 10484)
-* styles of text: Font styles. (line 1200)
-* styles, page: Page styles. (line 9669)
-* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 1956)
+ (line 6699)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 13462)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 13603)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 13603)
+* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 13599)
+* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 11216)
+* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 11847)
+* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 2160)
+* strut: \strut. (line 11711)
+* styles of text: Font styles. (line 1701)
+* styles, page: Page styles. (line 10878)
+* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 2544)
* subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2324)
+ (line 2919)
* subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 7977)
-* subsection: Sectioning. (line 1956)
-* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2260)
-* subsubsection: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2324)
+ (line 8887)
+* subsection: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2855)
+* subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 2544)
+* subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2919)
+* suffix package: \@ifstar. (line 7370)
* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 7977)
-* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 13458)
-* symbols package: Math symbols. (line 8040)
+ (line 8887)
+* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 14987)
+* symbol, defining: \DeclareTextSymbol.
+ (line 1593)
+* symbols, arrows: Arrows. (line 9834)
* symbols, boldface: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 9006)
-* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 8040)
-* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 12172)
-* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 4705)
-* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 4705)
-* table environment: table. (line 4854)
+ (line 9875)
+* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 8950)
+* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 13417)
+* system commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 15692)
+* system information: \write18. (line 15751)
+* T1: fontenc package. (line 1297)
+* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 5408)
+* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 5408)
+* table environment: table. (line 5557)
+* table of contents: \contentsline. (line 14466)
+* table of contents entry, create dotted line: \@dottedtocline.
+ (line 14296)
* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
- (line 12895)
-* table of contents file: Output files. (line 468)
+ (line 14332)
+* table of contents file: Output files. (line 496)
* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
- (line 6284)
+ (line 6996)
* table of contents, creating: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12801)
+ (line 14171)
* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning.
- (line 2024)
-* tables, creating: table. (line 4854)
-* tabular environment: tabular. (line 4914)
-* template, article: article template. (line 14118)
-* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 14087)
-* template, book: book template. (line 14138)
+ (line 2619)
+* tables, creating: table. (line 5557)
+* tabular environment: tabular. (line 5615)
+* template (simple), article: article template. (line 16090)
+* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 16060)
+* template, book: book template. (line 16113)
* template, book <1>: Larger book template.
- (line 14161)
-* template, TUGboat: tugboat template. (line 14211)
+ (line 16137)
* templates, document: Document templates.
- (line 14080)
-* terminal input/output: Terminal input/output.
- (line 13791)
-* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 12229)
-* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 12172)
-* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
-* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 12017)
-* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 12048)
+ (line 16053)
+* terminal input/output: Input/output. (line 15320)
+* terminal, writing to: \write. (line 15526)
+* TeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 13476)
+* texosquery package: \write18. (line 15751)
+* texput, jobname default: Jobname. (line 15969)
+* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 13417)
+* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13282)
+* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 13251)
+* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13282)
* textcase package: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12151)
-* textcomp package: Font styles. (line 1326)
-* textcomp package <1>: Text symbols. (line 12172)
-* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9732)
-* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 5239)
-* theorem environment: theorem. (line 5474)
-* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
-* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6884)
-* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 5474)
+ (line 13388)
+* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 13417)
+* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 10941)
+* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 5940)
+* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6177)
+* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 7610)
+* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 7610)
+* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6177)
* thin space: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9337)
+ (line 10547)
* thin space <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 10300)
+ (line 11513)
* thin space, negative: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 9351)
+ (line 10561)
* thin space, negative <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 10300)
+ (line 11513)
* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 12499)
-* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 12344)
-* tie: ~. (line 10244)
-* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 12436)
-* TikZ package: \line. (line 4397)
-* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 10540)
-* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 10771)
-* tilde accent: Accents. (line 12401)
-* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 9249)
-* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 12235)
+ (line 13813)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 13612)
+* tie: ~. (line 11453)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 13706)
+* TikZ package: \line. (line 5100)
+* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 11767)
+* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 11999)
+* tikz-cd package: Arrows. (line 9869)
+* tilde accent: Accents. (line 13671)
+* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 10447)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 13482)
* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
- (line 729)
-* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 5504)
-* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 9739)
-* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 5504)
+ (line 794)
+* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6207)
+* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 10948)
+* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6207)
* titlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 707)
-* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 9681)
-* titlesec package: \part. (line 2083)
-* titlesec package <1>: \chapter. (line 2162)
-* titlesec package <2>: \section. (line 2240)
-* titlesec package <3>: \subsection. (line 2306)
-* titlesec package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 2383)
+ (line 772)
+* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 10890)
+* titlesec package: Sectioning. (line 2598)
+* titlesec package <1>: \part. (line 2678)
+* titlesec package <2>: \chapter. (line 2757)
+* titlesec package <3>: \section. (line 2835)
+* titlesec package <4>: \subsection. (line 2901)
+* titlesec package <5>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
+ (line 2978)
* tocbibbind package: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12886)
-* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 2023)
-* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2024)
+ (line 14276)
+* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 2618)
+* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2619)
* tocloft package: Table of contents etc..
- (line 12886)
-* today's date: \today. (line 12541)
-* tombstone: \rule. (line 12513)
+ (line 14276)
+* today's date: \today. (line 13908)
+* tombstone: \rule. (line 13880)
* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
- (line 1792)
-* topnumber: Floats. (line 1938)
-* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1939)
-* totalnumber: Floats. (line 1942)
-* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 1943)
-* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 12347)
-* transcript file: Output files. (line 453)
-* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 477)
-* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 14211)
-* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 1534)
-* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 12350)
+ (line 2290)
+* topnumber: Floats. (line 2526)
+* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2527)
+* totalnumber: Floats. (line 2530)
+* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2531)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 13615)
+* transcript file: Output files. (line 481)
+* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* TS1 encoding: Text symbols. (line 13417)
+* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 2032)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 13618)
* twocolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 736)
+ (line 801)
* twoside option: Document class options.
- (line 736)
-* type styles: Font styles. (line 1200)
-* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 5543)
-* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 1340)
-* typefaces: Fonts. (line 1194)
-* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 1290)
-* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 3064)
+ (line 801)
+* type styles: Font styles. (line 1701)
+* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6246)
+* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 1840)
+* typefaces: Fonts. (line 1259)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 1792)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 3727)
* ulem package: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9275)
-* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 12378)
-* underbar: Accents. (line 12406)
+ (line 10473)
+* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 13648)
+* unbreakable space: ~. (line 11453)
+* underbar: Accents. (line 13676)
* underlining: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 9266)
-* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 12353)
-* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 477)
-* units, of length: Units of length. (line 7485)
+ (line 10464)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 13621)
+* Unicode: inputenc package. (line 13829)
+* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* unicode-math package: Greek letters. (line 10287)
+* units, of length: Units of length. (line 8258)
* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document.
- (line 340)
-* unordered lists: itemize. (line 3528)
+ (line 369)
+* unordered lists: itemize. (line 4210)
+* uplatex: TeX engines. (line 554)
+* uplatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 567)
* uppercase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 12115)
-* url package: \verb. (line 5614)
-* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 5416)
-* usrguide official documentation: About this document.
- (line 359)
-* UTF-8: TeX engines. (line 477)
-* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 7155)
-* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 9252)
-* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 5543)
-* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 5543)
-* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 5582)
-* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 5574)
-* verse environment: verse. (line 5629)
-* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 12247)
-* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 12244)
-* vertical mode: Modes. (line 9623)
-* vertical space: \vspace. (line 10569)
-* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 10649)
+ (line 13351)
+* url package: \verb. (line 6323)
+* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6119)
+* UTF-8, default LaTeX input encoding: Overview. (line 403)
+* UTF-8, engine support for: TeX engines. (line 505)
+* UTF-8, font support for: fontenc package. (line 1297)
+* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 7929)
+* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 10450)
+* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6246)
+* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6246)
+* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6290)
+* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 6282)
+* verse environment: verse. (line 6341)
+* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 13494)
+* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 13491)
+* vertical mode: Modes. (line 10832)
+* vertical space: \vspace. (line 11796)
+* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 11876)
* vertical space before paragraphs: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 7810)
+ (line 8714)
* vertical spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 9429)
-* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 9368)
-* visible space: \verb. (line 5607)
-* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 12356)
+ (line 10641)
+* vertical spacing <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10702)
+* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 10580)
+* visible space: \verb. (line 6315)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 13624)
* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1427)
-* white space: Spaces. (line 9922)
-* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 9255)
-* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 9258)
+ (line 1938)
+* whatsit item: \write. (line 15561)
+* white space: Spaces. (line 11131)
+* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 10453)
+* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 10456)
* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1439)
-* writing external files: filecontents. (line 3373)
-* writing letters: Letters. (line 13494)
-* x-height: Units of length. (line 7517)
-* xdvi command: Output files. (line 435)
-* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 510)
-* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 510)
-* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 510)
-* xindy: makeindex. (line 13333)
-* xindy program: makeindex. (line 13333)
+ (line 1950)
+* Wright, Joseph: Upper and lower case.
+ (line 13394)
+* writing external files: filecontents. (line 4036)
+* writing letters: Letters. (line 15023)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 8290)
+* xdvi command: Output files. (line 463)
+* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 541)
+* xelatex: TeX engines. (line 540)
+* xelatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 568)
+* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 541)
+* xindex program: makeindex. (line 14865)
+* xindy program: makeindex. (line 14858)
+* xparse package: LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 622)
+* xparse package <1>: \@ifstar. (line 7370)
+* xr package: xr package. (line 3410)
+* xr-hyper package: xr package. (line 3410)
+* xstring package: Jobname. (line 15997)